JP2020089604A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that achieves sound game ability and increase enjoyment of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine in which the ratio of shifting from a first period to a second period after a big winning game state is high when a set value is lower, when controlled to a high base state, the rate at which a movable body performance is executed in the second period is lower than the rate at which the movable body performance is executed in the first period, and the rate at which a countdown performance is executed in the second period is higher than the rate at which the countdown performance is executed in the first period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player and selects a variation pattern according to the setting value has been proposed. There is.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19)

In a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values as described in Patent Document 1, if the set value is high, the period required until the next big hit occurs is short However, there is a problem that the game playability becomes too high and a sound game playability cannot be realized. In addition, when the set value is low, there is a problem that it takes a long time until the next big hit occurs and the interest is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, it is possible to realize a sound gaming property and improve the interest. To aim.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
And a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is an advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit game state), and a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous for the player (high accuracy/high base state ( Probability change state)) and
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
As a period to be controlled to the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times after the game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) (Or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period ( A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special state game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without transitioning to the big hit gaming state after the gaming state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state )) and
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is “ When it becomes "out of range", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out" (variation display) is a variation display period that is longer than "non-reach out (shortened variation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). (Period is 30 seconds) or "Out of super reach" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected higher than in the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "out of bounds", in the second period, in the second period, "non-reach out of bounds (high-speed fluctuation)", which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach out of bounds (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period is 5 seconds) (variable display) (Period of 1 second) is selected higher than in the first period [excluding final fluctuation]),
The ratio of transition from the first period to the second period when the first set value (set value 1) is the second set value (set value 6) having a higher advantage than the first set value. It is higher than the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period (when the setting value is 1, the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period is from the first period to the second period when the setting value is 6). Higher than the transition rate),
The movable body (movable body 24TM200) is provided with a production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body production (a movable body production shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10).
The execution ratio of the movable body effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the movable body effect in the second period (as shown in FIG. 12-2, when the first period is (step By YES in S24TM1030), by determining whether or not to execute the movable body effect (step S24TM1110), the movable body effect can be executed as the prefetching notice effect, while in the second period (in step S24TM1230). (YES), it is determined whether or not to execute the countdown effect without determining whether or not to execute the movable object effect (step S24TM1310), so that the movable object effect cannot be executed as the prefetch notice effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before variable display (variable display) is executed;
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) executes a notice effect based on the determination made by the determination means (a look-ahead notice effect that predicts the jackpot expectation in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended)). A game machine characterized by being possible.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a notice effect common to the first period and the second period (if it is the first period (YES in step S24TM1030), prefetch notice). The hold change effect can be executed as the effect, and if it is the second period (YES in step S24TM1230), the hold change effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means F2 or means F3,
The execution ratio of the notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the notice effect in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-3 to 12-6, the hold as the prefetch notice effect in the second period). The execution ratio of the change effect is higher than the execution ratio of the pending change effect as the prefetch notice effect in the first period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game during the second period.

The game machine of means F5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F4,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states (“10R normal big hit [100 times]”, “10R probability variable big hit [next time], etc. as big hit types),
When the gaming state control means (CPU 103) controls to a particular type of advantageous state (“2R probability variation big hit [next time” as big hit type)”, variable display pattern in the first period and the second period Is common (in the first period, the variation pattern is determined based on the same variation pattern determination table as in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the first period when the advantageous state of a specific type is controlled.

The game machine of means F6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F5,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The execution ratio of the special effect in the second period differs depending on the variable display count (as shown in FIG. 12-14, the larger the value of the variable display count n in the second period, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect). Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game during the second period.

The game machine of means D1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
And a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is an advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit game state), and a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous for the player (high accuracy/high base state ( Probability change state)) and
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
As a period to be controlled to the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times after the game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) (Or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period ( A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special state game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without transitioning to the big hit gaming state after the gaming state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state )) and
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is “ When it becomes "out of range", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out" (variation display) is a variation display period that is longer than "non-reach out (shortened variation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). (Period is 30 seconds) or "Out of super reach" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected higher than in the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "out of bounds", in the second period, in the second period, "non-reach out of bounds (high-speed fluctuation)", which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach out of bounds (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period is 5 seconds) (variable display) (Period of 1 second) is selected higher than in the first period [excluding final fluctuation]),
The ratio of transition from the first period to the second period when the first set value (set value 1) is the second set value (set value 6) having a higher advantage than the first set value. It is higher than the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period (when the setting value is 1, the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period is from the first period to the second period when the setting value is 6). Higher than the transition rate),
Judgment means (CPU 103) for judging whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) before variable display (variable display) is executed,
A production control unit (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an advance production (prefetch advance production that announces the expectation of a big hit in a variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended)) based on the determination made by the determination unit. ,,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of advance productions (movable body productions, countdown productions) as the advance productions (prefetch advance productions),
The type of notice effect that can be executed in the first period and the type of notice effect that can be executed in the second period are different (in the case of the first period as shown in FIG. 12-2 (step S24TM1030 YES), the movable body effect can be executed as the prefetching notice effect (step S24TM1110), and if it is the second period (YES in step S24TM1230), the countdown effect can be executed as the prefetching notice effect (step S24TM1310). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a notice effect common to the first period and the second period (if it is the first period (YES in step S24TM1030), prefetch notice). The hold change effect can be executed as the effect, and if it is the second period (YES in step S24TM1230), the hold change effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
The execution ratio of the notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the notice effect in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-3 to 12-6, the hold as the prefetch notice effect in the second period). The execution ratio of the change effect is higher than the execution ratio of the pending change effect as the prefetch notice effect in the first period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game during the second period.

The game machine of means D4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D3,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states (“10R normal big hit [100 times]”, “10R probability variable big hit [next time], etc. as big hit types),
When the gaming state control means (CPU 103) controls to a particular type of advantageous state (“2R probability variation big hit [next time” as big hit type)”, variable display pattern in the first period and the second period Is common (in the first period, the variation pattern is determined based on the same variation pattern determination table as in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the first period when the advantageous state of a specific type is controlled.

The game machine of means D5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D4,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The execution ratio of the special effect in the second period differs depending on the variable display count (as shown in FIG. 12-14, the larger the value of the variable display count n in the second period, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect). Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game during the second period.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
And a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is an advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit game state), and a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous for the player (high accuracy/high base state ( Probability change state)) and
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
As a period to be controlled to the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times after the game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) (Or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period ( A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special state game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without transitioning to the big hit gaming state after the gaming state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state )) and
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is “ When it becomes "out of range", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out" (variation display) is a variation display period that is longer than "non-reach out (shortened variation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). (Period is 30 seconds) or "Out of super reach" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected higher than in the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "out of bounds", in the second period, in the second period, "non-reach out of bounds (high-speed fluctuation)", which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach out of bounds (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period is 5 seconds) (variable display) (Period of 1 second) is selected higher than in the first period [excluding final fluctuation]),
The ratio of transition from the first period to the second period when the first set value (set value 1) is the second set value (set value 6) having a higher advantage than the first set value. It is higher than the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period (when the setting value is 1, the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period is from the first period to the second period when the setting value is 6). Higher than the transition rate),
A performance control unit capable of executing a predetermined performance (a performance for outputting a performance music during a game, a performance for displaying a different background image depending on the performance mode) in at least the second period of the period controlled to the special state. (Reproduction control CPU 120)
It is possible to change the mode of the predetermined effect based on the operation of the player at least in the second period of the period controlled to the special state (as shown in FIG. 12-13 (11), by the player). Based on the operation of the push button 31B, the effect music output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed in response to the effect music shown in the effect music selection icon 24TM100 being changed to [Music X]. (Switching from song A to song X)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second period.

The game machine of means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
The predetermined performance includes reproduction of music (direction music),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the music to be played based on the operation of the player in the second period (as shown in FIG. 12-13 (11), depending on the player). Based on the operation of the push button 31B, the effect music output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed in response to the effect music shown in the effect music selection icon 24TM100 being changed to [Music X]. (Switching from song A to song X)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second period.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E2,
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is capable of controlling in any one of a plurality of effect modes (“FEVERZONE”, “classic mode”, “premier mode”).
The executable effects are different depending on the effect mode (when the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", the countdown effect can be executed, while when the effect mode is "premier mode", the effect effect can be executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means E4 is
A gaming machine of means E3,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can control one of a plurality of effect modes in the second period based on the operation of the player (the player in the second period). It is possible to switch to any one of the effect modes of "FEVERZONE", "classic mode" and "premier mode" based on the operation of the push button 31B by.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second period.

The game machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before variable display (variable display) is executed;
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) executes a notice effect based on the determination made by the determination means (a look-ahead notice effect that predicts the jackpot expectation in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended)). Is possible,
Depending on the effect mode, the execution ratio of the notice effect is different (when the effect mode is “classic mode”) <[when the effect mode is “premier mode”] <when the effect mode is “FEVERZONE”] Execution rate of prefetch notice production is increasing in order)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second period.

The game machine of means E6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E5,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The execution ratio of the special effect in the second period differs depending on the variable display count (as shown in FIG. 12-14, the larger the value of the variable display count n in the second period, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect). Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game during the second period.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, and a variation pattern according to the setting value. A gaming machine of choice has been proposed. In a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values as described in JP-A-2018-47306 (FIG. 19), if the set value is high, the next big hit occurs. There is a problem that it takes a short period of time and the gambling performance becomes too high, so that it is not possible to realize sound game playability. In addition, when the set value is low, there is a problem that it takes a long time until the next big hit occurs and the interest is reduced. The inventions relating to the means A1 to A11 are made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and realize a sound gaming property in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values. The purpose is to improve the interest.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
And a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
Advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit gaming state) and special state advantageous to the player that is different from the advantageous state (high-probability/high base state (probability change state), high-probability/second KT state) (Small hit RUSH state)),
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) Until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed) and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without shifting to the big hit game state after shifting to the certainty/high base state. Yes,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is “ When it becomes "out of range", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out" (variation display) is a variation display period that is longer than "non-reach out (shortened variation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). (Period is 30 seconds) or "Out of super reach" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected higher than in the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "out of bounds", in the second period, in the second period, "non-reach out of bounds (high-speed fluctuation)", which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach out of bounds (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period is 5 seconds) (variable display) (Period of 1 second) is higher than that of the first period [excluding final fluctuation])
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a healthy game play when the game state is the special state and to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the production is provided,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) is a gaming state different from the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)) and is advantageous to the player in a predetermined state (low-probability/high-base state (time saving state). )) is controllable,
The effect control means can execute an effect common to the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in (B1) and (C1) of FIG. 11-4, the effect control CPU 120 is a jackpot game). After the end, the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/low-base state (time saving state) and the gaming state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state). Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to the chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the production is provided,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-13(1) and (5) to (7). , 1st period [Final fluctuation] (The special display game of the 50th time after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit" In the subsequent 100th special drawing game), the production control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge production that suggests that the first period shifts to the second period (the high base state of the gaming state continues). Exist)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The game machine of means A4,
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A3,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) can control to a special state (small hitting gaming state) which is a gaming state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
The special state is a gaming state in which a gaming value is likely to be imparted by the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state is set. By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened and it is controlled so that the game ball can be easily won in the special variable winning ball device.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means A5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit game state), a predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small-hit RUSH state)) and which is advantageous to the player. State (probability change state)),
It is possible to control to the special state in response to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (transition to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after completion of the big hit game, and fluctuation of 100 times) If the next big hit does not occur on the display, the continuous challenge effect is executed at the 100th change display, and the 101st change display shifts to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The game machine of means A6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit game state), a predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small-hit RUSH state)) and which is advantageous to the player. State (probability change state)),
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the game state being different from the advantageous state and being controlled to the special state advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times (high accuracy after the jackpot game is finished/ If the next big hit does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times, the variation display becomes the 50th occurrence of the small hit. In the success mode, the continuous challenge production is executed, and the variation display after the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small hit is 50 times is changed to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The game machine of means A7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A6,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the production is provided,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) that suggests a set value,
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period and the execution rate of the special effect in the second period are different (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 10%, while on the other hand, in the second period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final change of the second period. , The execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for each change display excluding the final change in the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for the final change in the second period is 10%).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A8,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the production is provided,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) as special effects that suggest setting values.
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period is different from the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period (when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period]). (YES in step S21TM1000), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestive effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and the presence/absence of execution of the second setting suggestive effect is determined in step S21TM1050. As shown, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A9,
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A8,
Production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling production,
A corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A10,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9,
Production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling production,
A corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on a hold display or an active display),
The execution ratio of the action effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the action effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the action effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A10,
Production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling production,
And a determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (big hit game state) before variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notice effect based on the determination made by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 predicts a big hit expectation in a variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) in advance. Notice production can be executed),
The execution ratio of the notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the notice effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the prefetch notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). Exist)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, and change according to the setting value. A game machine for selecting a pattern has been proposed. In a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values as described in JP-A-2018-47306 (FIG. 19), when it is controlled in a state advantageous to the player. There is room to improve the interest of the. The inventions relating to the means B1 to B11 are made in view of the above situation, and in a gaming machine in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, control is performed in a state advantageous to the player. The purpose is to improve the enjoyment when being.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
A game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
Advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit gaming state) and special state advantageous to the player that is different from the advantageous state (high-probability/high base state (probability change state), high-probability/second KT state) (Small hit RUSH state)),
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) Until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed) and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without shifting to the big hit game state after shifting to the certainty/high base state. Yes,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 causes the variation pattern with super reach (“super reach out”, “super reach”, “super”). In the "reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle effect is performed to notify whether or not the teammate and the enemy character have won the jackpot by performing a battle)),
The execution rate of the specific effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the specific effect in the second period (when the variation display result is “out”, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A1)). In the first period [excluding final fluctuation], the ratio of “out of super reach” selected as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], while as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C1), (In the second period, the rate at which “out of super reach” is selected as the variation pattern is [0%])
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the game state is the special state.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) is a gaming state different from the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)) and is advantageous to the player in a predetermined state (low-probability/high-base state (time saving state). )) is controllable,
The effect control means can execute an effect common to the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in (B1) and (C1) of FIG. 11-4, the effect control CPU 120 is a jackpot game). After the end, the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/low-base state (time saving state) and the gaming state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state). Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to the chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-13(1) and (5) to (7). , 1st period [Final fluctuation] (The special display game of the 50th time after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit" In the subsequent 100th special drawing game), the production control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge production that suggests that the first period shifts to the second period (the high base state of the gaming state continues). Exist)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The game machine of means B4 is
The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B3,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) can control to a special state (small hitting gaming state) which is a gaming state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
The special state is a gaming state in which a gaming value is likely to be imparted by the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state is set. By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened and it is controlled so that the game ball can be easily won in the special variable winning ball device.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit game state), a predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small-hit RUSH state)) and which is advantageous to the player. State (probability change state)),
It is possible to control to the special state in response to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (transition to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after completion of the big hit game, and fluctuation of 100 times) If the next big hit does not occur on the display, the continuous challenge effect is executed at the 100th change display, and the 101st change display shifts to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit game state), a predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small-hit RUSH state)) and which is advantageous to the player. State (probability change state)),
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the game state being different from the advantageous state and being controlled to the special state advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times (high accuracy after the jackpot game is finished/ If the next big hit does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times, the variation display becomes the 50th occurrence of the small hit. In the success mode, the continuous challenge production is executed, and the variation display after the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small hit is 50 times is changed to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The game machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of the means B1 to the means B6,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) that suggests a set value,
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period and the execution rate of the special effect in the second period are different (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 10%, while on the other hand, in the second period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final change of the second period. , The execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for each change display excluding the final change in the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for the final change in the second period is 10%).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) as special effects that suggest setting values.
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period is different from the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period (when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period]). (YES in step S21TM1000), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestive effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and the presence/absence of execution of the second setting suggestive effect is determined in step S21TM1050. As shown, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8,
A correspondence display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a correspondence display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9,
A correspondence display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a correspondence display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on a hold display or an active display),
The execution ratio of the action effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the action effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the action effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10,
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before variable display (variable display) is executed;
The effect control means is capable of executing a notice effect based on the determination made by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 predicts a big hit expectation in a variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) in advance. Notice production can be executed),
The execution ratio of the notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the notice effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the prefetch notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). Exist)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, and to suggest a setting value. A game machine that executes is proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), there is room for improving the interest of the production related to the setting suggestion. The inventions relating to the means C1 to C11 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of the production regarding the suggestion of the setting.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
A game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a special production (first production suggesting production, second production suggesting production) relating to setting suggestion,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
Advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit gaming state) and special state advantageous to the player that is different from the advantageous state (high-probability/high base state (probability change state), high-probability/second KT state) (Small hit RUSH state)),
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) Until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed) and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without shifting to the big hit game state after shifting to the certainty/high base state. Yes,
The selection ratio of the specific variable display pattern is different between the first period and the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1) when the variable display result is “out”). , The selection ratio of fluctuation patterns with super-reach in the first period (“out of super reach”) is higher than the selection ratio of fluctuation patterns with super-reach in the second period (“out of super reach”) ,
The execution rate of the special effect is different between the first period and the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect is determined for each variable display, so The execution ratio of the 1st setting suggestive effect is 10% On the other hand, in the 2nd period, since it is determined whether or not to execute the 1st setting suggesting effect only in the final change of the 2nd period, the final change of the 2nd period (The execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for each variation display except 0 is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for the final variation of the second period is 10%).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) is a gaming state different from the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)) and is advantageous to the player in a predetermined state (low-probability/high-base state (time saving state). )) is controllable,
The effect control means can execute an effect common to the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in (B1) and (C1) of FIG. 11-4, the effect control CPU 120 is a jackpot game). After the end, the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/low-base state (time saving state) and the gaming state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state). Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to the chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-13(1) and (5) to (7). , 1st period [Final fluctuation] (The special display game of the 50th time after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit" In the subsequent 100th special drawing game), the production control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge production that suggests that the first period shifts to the second period (the high base state of the gaming state continues). Exist)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C3,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) can control to a special state (small hitting gaming state) which is a gaming state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
The special state is a gaming state in which a gaming value is likely to be imparted by the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state is set. By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened and it is controlled so that the game ball can be easily won in the special variable winning ball device.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit game state), a predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small-hit RUSH state)) and which is advantageous to the player. State (probability change state)),
It is possible to control to the special state in response to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (transition to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after completion of the big hit game, and fluctuation of 100 times) If the next big hit does not occur on the display, the continuous challenge effect is executed at the 100th change display, and the 101st change display shifts to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit game state), a predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state (small-hit RUSH state)) and which is advantageous to the player. State (probability change state)),
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the game state being different from the advantageous state and being controlled to the special state advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times (high accuracy after the jackpot game is finished/ If the next big hit does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times, the variation display becomes the 50th occurrence of the small hit. In the success mode, the continuous challenge production is executed, and the variation display after the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small hit is 50 times is changed to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6,
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period and the execution rate of the special effect in the second period are different (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 10%, while on the other hand, in the second period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final change of the second period. , The execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for each change display excluding the final change in the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect for the final change in the second period is 10%).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect),
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period is different from the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period (when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period]). (YES in step S21TM1000), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestive effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and the presence/absence of execution of the second setting suggestive effect is determined in step S21TM1050. As shown, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8,
A correspondence display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a correspondence display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C9,
A correspondence display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a correspondence display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on a hold display or an active display),
The execution ratio of the action effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the action effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the action effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C10,
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before variable display (variable display) is executed;
The effect control means is capable of executing a notice effect based on the determination made by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 predicts a big hit expectation in a variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) in advance. Notice production can be executed),
The execution ratio of the notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the notice effect in the second period are different (the execution ratio of the prefetch notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). Exist)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the set value (see, for example, JP 2010-200902 A). .. As the game machine in JP 2010-200902 A, for example, a random number for determination value generating means for generating a random number for determination for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state is provided within a predetermined numerical range. , Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set in the gaming machine, it is judged whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It is conceivable that the probability of controlling to the advantageous state is changed by changing the number of advantageous state determination values for each set value set in the gaming machine. However, when the number of advantageous state determination values is different for each set value set in the gaming machine in this way, when the advantageous state determination value is set over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random number value matches the advantageous state determination value. Since it is necessary to determine whether or not to perform it multiple times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state becomes large. The invention according to means 1 to 21 is made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for determining whether to control in an advantageous state. To do.

The gaming machine described in means 1,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
With game control means that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range within a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 and FIG. Is a part that is set as a continuous numerical value range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a normal state or a probability change state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine described in means 1,
A storage unit (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying the set value set by the setting unit;
The advantageous state determination means reads the set value information stored in the storage means every time it determines whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41). 207 SGS550)), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical value range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical value range. , 207SG556 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. Part of setting the display result determination table according to the set value read in the processing of 207SG550 in the processing of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set every time it is determined by the advantageous state determination means whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set. It is possible to prevent inappropriate determination.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine described in means 2,
The storage means can store the setting value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determining means as determination used setting value information (for example, the CPU 103 special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41). In the processing of 207SGS566 of (1), the setting value performed in the processing of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as a determination used setting value),
Collation capable of collating for every predetermined period whether or not the setting value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determination used setting value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determining means. It is characterized by further comprising means (for example, the CPU 103, in the processing of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 8-41, a portion for comparing the set value specified in the processing of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value).
According to this feature, it can be specified that the inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set by the inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine described in means 3,
The collation unit performs collation each time the advantageous state determination unit determines whether to control the advantageous state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, the CPU 103 displays a variable display). (A part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 each time it is executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, verification is performed every time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so that it is possible to more accurately specify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine described in means 3 or 4,
Error notification means capable of executing an error notification indicating that the set value information is abnormal when the comparison results of the comparison means are not the same (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs error notification processing (207SGS439)). By executing the above, the image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error).
According to this feature, the fact that the setting value information is abnormal can be recognized around the gaming machine, and the abnormal setting value information can be dealt with quickly.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine described in means 5,
The game control means controls the game to an inoperable state in which the game is inoperable when the result of the collation by the collating means is not the same, and error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as the comparison result of 207SGS552, the process shifts to the loop processing. And the part that executes the process of 207SGS554 and sends an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the CPU 103 to perform the error notification process (207SGS439)). (A part that determines whether or not an error designation command is received and, when an error designation command is received, executes error notification according to the received error designation command)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed by the determination based on the inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
The advantageous state determination means determines, for each variable display, whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, a variable display result determination module is executed each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display. Part that determines the variable display result using),
Suspended storage means capable of storing the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means as the reserved memory when the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. Section that executes the processing of 207SGS510).
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determination means, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the pending storage (for example, the winning prize shown in FIG. Part that executes the time random value judgment process),
Further equipped with,
The pre-determination unit performs the pre-determination by performing a process common to the process for determining whether the advantageous state determination unit controls the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins a prize). (A part that determines the variable display result by using the variable display result determination module even in the random number determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the processing of the preliminary determination means can be made common, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
Storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means;
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Further equipped with,
The game control means can control the special state based on the fact that the special state determination means determines to control the special state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display result is a small hit). The part which updates the value of the figure process flag to 8" and controls the small hitting game state),
The special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, is a common continuous value from the special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so as to be the numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the small hit judgment regardless of the set value. Part that is set as the common range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether to control the special state according to the special state determination value included in the common numerical value range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The setting value information stored in the storage means is read for each time, and the special state determination value included in the common numerical value range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is set (for example, FIG. As shown in 8-17 to 8-20, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hitting determination value is the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the variation special figure. If is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hitting determination value is the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the setting value, but the CPU 103 always reads the setting value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, (A part for determining whether or not the variable display result is a small hit by setting the display result determination table according to the read set value)
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic part, the processing load for determining whether to control the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In this case, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value specified from the setting value information can be shared, so that the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
For the set value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, pachinko games If the setting value set for machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical value range for the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for the most disadvantageous set value for the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state by targeting only the common numerical value range of the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
With game control means that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range within a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 and FIG. Is a part that is set as a continuous numerical value range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a normal state or a probability change state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation unit and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to perform a plurality of times of determination as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on each numerical value range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a numerical range that is continuous from the value, the advantageous state determination means uses the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value of the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination whether or not to control in the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state. You can

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state on the basis that it is determined by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, the probability of determining to control to the advantageous state, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value A game control capable of controlling to a normal state corresponding to a normal number which is a number or a special state corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on becoming the advantageous state. Means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range within a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. (A portion where the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the large hitting determination value 1253 is set as a continuous numerical value range with the big hit reference value),
The advantageous state determination value, in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of the normal state or the special state, is set to be a numerical range continuous from the predetermined reference value (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the big hit is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the big hit reference value regardless of whether it is the normal state or the probability variation state. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation unit and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to perform a plurality of times of determination as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on each numerical value range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a numerical range that is continuous from the value, the advantageous state determination means uses the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value of the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination whether or not to control in the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state. You can
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random number value is the advantageous state determination value If it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes the predetermined reference value, The state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special jackpot gaming state) and a special state (for example, a small jackpot gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state when it is determined by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control to the special state when it is determined to be controlled to the special state by the special state determination means. With game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range that is common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is within a predetermined numerical range, the first common numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value, and is set,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which a range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is 1253 with 1020 as the big hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical value range,
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is used as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094. (The range of is set as the common numerical value range for the small hit judgment value)
When performing the variable display of the first identification information, the special state determination means determines whether to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIG. 8-17 and FIG. 8-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, in the small hitting gaming state with the 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value. (A part for determining whether or not to control), when performing variable display of the second identification information, whether to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Judgment (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the small value is determined by the 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether to control the winning gaming state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, they are set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to FIG. As shown in 8-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value is 655, but the numerical value range of the small hitting judgment value is set to 3267 which is a common value as the small hitting reference value regardless of the variation special figure. Part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control the advantageous condition. The processing load to perform can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value (the random number value for determination is the special state determination value). When it is determined that the special state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determination means can determine whether to control the special state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the second reference value according to the variation special map, It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range that is common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is within a predetermined numerical range, the first common numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value, and is set,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which a range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is 1253 with 1020 as the big hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical value range,
The special state determination value continues from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value that is most likely to be controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set irrespective of the set value set by the setting means so as to be within the second common numerical value range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, for small hits). The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the big hit judgment value when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 32767 is always the small hit standard. It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a value, and if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, 32767 is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 as a small hit reference value).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
Especially, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment value depends on the set value to be set. Since it is possible to always specify the numerical range of 1 in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control the advantageous condition. The processing load to perform can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the numerical value range of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generation means On the other hand, it is necessary to perform the determination as to whether or not to control the special state based on a plurality of times, while in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation means and the common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since it only has to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
Setting values of a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous determination value and a disadvantageous determination value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the setting values (up to 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. The probability that is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value (for example, a normal state or a time saving state) or the advantageous state. Based on the state, the game control means (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. Part to execute the special symbol process processing shown in 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range that is common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is within a predetermined numerical range, the first common numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value, and is set,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which a range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is 1253 with 1020 as the big hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical value range,
The advantageous state determination value is set in the predetermined numerical range to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value regardless of the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the big hit is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the big hit reference value regardless of whether it is the normal state or the probability variation state. part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set so as to be the second common numerical value range continuous from the value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, 1024 to 1346. In a range different from the numerical range of or 1020 to 1674, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, 32767 is always small. It is set as a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33094 as a hit reference value, and if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, whether the set value or the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state. (A part that is always set as a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means is Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified in the same range, so that the processing load of determining whether to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means always uses the numerical value range of the special state judgment value as a numerical range regardless of the set value. Since it suffices to specify the same numerical range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical range that is continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical value of the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value. A process of determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state, since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the range and the non-common numerical value range. The load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, each numerical value of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generating means. While it is necessary to perform the determination as to whether or not to control the special state based on the range a plurality of times, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. The special state determination means controls the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since the determination as to whether or not it is necessary to be performed only once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
With game control means that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range within a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting value ( It is set including the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, which is a range up to values corresponding to 2 to 6 values excluding 1),
The common numerical value range is set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and 1020 to 1237 The part where the range is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range (for example, FIGS. 8-55 and 8). As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are set as the numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical value range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probabilities of being set can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value. Particularly, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range and is larger than the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, or By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the state determination value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, the non-common value range is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value can be further reduced. You can

The gaming machine of means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value to the player). Setting value (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32),
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
With game control means that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical value range, a common numerical value range that is common to each setting value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237) Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of different non-common numerical value values that can be set by the setting means (for example, 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value (all values of 1 to 6)) ) And are set,
The common numerical value range is set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and 1020 to 1237 The part where the range is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range (for example, FIGS. 8-55 and 8). As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are set as the numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical value range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probabilities of being set can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value. Particularly, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range and is larger than the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, or By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the state determination value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, the non-common value range is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value can be further reduced. You can

The gaming machine of means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 16,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
A plurality of levels of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player. A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical value range common to each setting value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). Is set,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range within a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. (A portion where the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the large hitting determination value 1253 is set as a continuous numerical value range with the big hit reference value),
The special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, FIGS. 8-53 and 8). As shown in −54, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to a numerical range including 328 determination values consecutive to the numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of the set value being set. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
Particularly in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are continuously set, the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generating means is the advantageous state determination. Whether the value or the value between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether it is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or the value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value When determining whether to control to the advantageous state or the special state based on (whether or not), the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generating means is the minimum value in the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value. Whether or not it is a value between the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. It is possible to determine at a time whether or not to control to the advantageous state or the special state by determining whether the value is between the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state determination value and the special state determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control and the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 17,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special jackpot gaming state) and a special state (for example, a small jackpot gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range that is common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is within a predetermined numerical range, the first common numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value, and is set,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which a range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is 1253 with 1020 as the big hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical value range,
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so that it becomes the consecutive second common numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a numerical range continuous from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, (A portion in which the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical value range for the small hit determination value, with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
When performing the variable display of the first identification information, the special state determination means determines whether to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIG. 8-17 and FIG. 8-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, in the small hitting gaming state with the 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value. (A part for determining whether or not to control), when performing variable display of the second identification information, whether to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Judgment (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the small value is determined by the 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether to control the winning gaming state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the setting is such that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is the highest so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, a small hit determination The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the value is 328, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655 when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, but the small hit The numerical range of the judgment value is 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a hit reference value, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, it is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, it is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. Part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means is Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified in the same range, so that the processing load of determining whether to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control the advantageous condition. The processing load to perform can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the numerical value range of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generation means On the other hand, it is necessary to perform the determination as to whether or not to control the special state based on a plurality of times, while in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation means and the common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since it only has to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random number value is the advantageous state determination value When it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes the first reference value. The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the first reference value depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value (the random number value for determination is the special state determination value). When it is determined that the special state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determination means can determine whether to control the special state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the second reference value according to the variation special map, It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 18,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special jackpot gaming state) and a special state (for example, a small jackpot gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of levels of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player. A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. The probability that is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value (for example, a normal state or a time saving state) or the advantageous state. Based on the state, the game control means (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. Part to execute the special symbol process processing shown in 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range that is common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range within a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 8-17). Is a portion in which a range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is 1253 with 1020 as the big hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical value range,
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is set as the small hit reference value, and the value from 32767 to 33094 is set. (The part where the range is set as the common numerical value range for the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set in the predetermined numerical range to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value regardless of the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the big hit is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the big hit reference value regardless of whether it is the normal state or the probability variation state. part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether the set value is set by the setting unit and the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-). As shown in 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674 which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In a different range, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, 32767-33094 of 3267-33094 is always used as the small hit reference value. It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, 32767 is always the small hit reference value. As a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33421),
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit is If the variation special map is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value to be set, it is always set as a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value, and the variation special figure is the second. If it is a special symbol, regardless of the set value to be set, the part that is always set as a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
When performing the variable display of the first identification information, the special state determination means determines whether to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIG. 8-17 and FIG. 8-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, in the small hitting gaming state with the 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value. (A part for determining whether or not to control), when performing variable display of the second identification information, whether to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Judgment (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the small value is determined by the 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether to control the winning gaming state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the setting is such that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is the highest so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the fluctuation special map is the first special symbol). In some cases, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value is 328, and when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value is 655. However, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the range, 32767 is a small hit reference value, and if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, it is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, 32767 to 33421. (The part set to the numerical range of)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means is Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified in the same range, so that the processing load of determining whether to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control the advantageous condition. The processing load to perform can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the numerical value range of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generation means On the other hand, it is necessary to perform the determination as to whether or not to control the special state based on a plurality of times, while in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation means and the common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since it only has to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random number value is the advantageous state determination value If it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes the predetermined reference value, The state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value (the random number value for determination is the special state determination value). When it is determined that the special state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determination means can determine whether to control the special state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the second reference value according to the variation special map, It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
A plurality of stages of setting values including at least advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain value 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range that is common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is within a predetermined numerical range, the first common numerical value range and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). It is set including a non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, which is a range up to a value corresponding to a value (a value of 2 to 6 excluding 1),
The first common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the setting value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value. As a part where a range from 1020 to 1253 which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as a continuous numerical value range,
The non-common numerical range is set to be a numerical range continuous from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 8-55). And as shown in FIG. 8-56, when the set values are 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value. Part),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range from the second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical value of the small hitting determination value is set. If the range is different from the common numerical value range or the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value that is set, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094. And, if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state. In particular, in the present invention, it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hitting determination value, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 changes the setting value shown in FIG. 8-32). Part that executes processing),
Random value generation means for determination (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting section) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and whether to control in the special state. 207SG154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number of jackpot determination values, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is different),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical value range, a first common numerical value range that is common to each setting value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237) And a non-common big hit judgment value that is a range from a non-common numerical value range (for example, 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (1 to 6 values)) that can be set by the setting means. Numeric range) and are set,
The common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as the big hit reference value. The range from 1020 to 1253 which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as a continuous numerical value range),
The non-common numerical range is set so as to be a numerical range continuous from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 8-55 and FIG. As shown in 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value. ),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical value range from the second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is In a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value that is set, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094. And, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state. In particular, in the present invention, it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hitting determination value, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether to control the special state.

The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probability change state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probability change state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for deviations. It is an explanatory view showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory view showing a data holding area for effect control, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a start winning award reception command buffer. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of an error in the set value error or when the system is restored from the power interruption during the setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during the setting change process, and (B) when a setting value error occurs, or The change of the display mode of a special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during setting change is shown. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. It is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart showing a random number value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display result determination module. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize|stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of starting a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operating speed in operation|movement of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change timing of the set value and the confirmation end timing of the set value, and the number of times the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command in feature section 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 40F. It is a flow chart which shows sub side game stop processing in characteristic part 40F. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table referred in a low probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table referred in a high probability state. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the hold display and active display in the low accuracy/low base state, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the hold display and active display in the low accuracy/high base state. Yes, (C) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the hold display and the active display in the high accuracy/high base state. It is the explanation drawing which shows the game flow regarding each production mode. (A) is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in a first period [excluding final fluctuation], and (B) is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in a first period [final fluctuation]. It is a figure and (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table referred in the 2nd period. Special Figure 1 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the jackpot gaming state. Special Figure 2 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the jackpot gaming state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing at the time of change start. (A) is an explanatory view showing an execution presence/absence determination table of a first setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution presence/absence decision table of a cut-in notice effect, and (C) is a second setting suggestion effect. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution presence/absence determination table of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st setting suggestion production in a 1st period, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st setting suggestion production in a 2nd period. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 2nd setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding continuous challenge production. (A) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode and effect music in the low-accuracy/high-base state, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode and effect music in the high-accuracy/high-base state. is there. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize effect determination processing. (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table of active display in the first period, and (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern determination table of the reserved display for one reserved in the first period, (C1) is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table of the hold display for two hold in the first period. (D1) is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table of the hold display for three hold in the first period, and (E1) is an explanation showing a change pattern determination table of the hold display for four hold in the first period. It is a figure. (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table of active display in the second period, (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern determination table of the reserved display for one reserved in the second period, (C2) is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table of the hold display for two hold in the second period. (D2) is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table of the hold display for three holds in the second period, and (E2) is an explanation showing a change pattern determination table of the hold display for four holds in the second period. It is a figure. (A) is an explanatory view showing the execution presence/absence determination table of the movable body effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a execution presence/absence determination table of the countdown effect. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the first period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in a 1st period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in a 1st period. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the second period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in a 2nd period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in a 2nd period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence determination table of 1st setting suggestion production.

(Basic explanation)

First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol (a symbol deviating from the symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "deleting the symbol". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (disappearing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "disappear".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “out”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach out") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach out"). In addition, when the display result is “out”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach out” is displayed). (Also referred to as “”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “out of reach”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)

First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, the process of prefetching the display result and the variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a falling symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Further, when the display result is “out”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "off", the gaming state is updated when the time-saving state or the probability variation state is controlled, and when the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)

Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetching notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command for designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “out”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment)

Next, the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge that constitutes a gaming board surface. Board 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two places on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, a hold storage display is displayed that can specify the variable display hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game. The left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where the game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is a game. The ball is formed in the right game area 207SG002R which can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hit) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. A game ball that is stronger (right-handed) than a game ball that flows down is a game area that flows down through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won at the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) etc. which will be described later in the set value changed state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. As will be described later in detail, the setting value change state in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ) Is also.

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operating portion that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 are included. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. By using the game machine frame 207SG003 to open, it becomes possible to operate. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing variable display of 1 special map, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of second special symbol, first hold display capable of displaying first reserved memory number 207SG025A, the second holding display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second holding storage number, the normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing the variable display of the normal design, the general drawing holding display 207SG025C capable of displaying the general drawing holding storage, In a gaming state in which a round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hitting game (big hitting type) during a big hitting game, a high basing state (time saving state), a big hitting game state, or the like, is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in a probability variation state, and a time saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the case of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a deviation or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed with a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is variably displayed with two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of illuminated LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is different from the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, although the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different. At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has LEDs of four segments arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED on the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, in response to the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display have a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment). In part 207SG, the light goes out toward the left).

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It is like this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED at the left end of the first reservation indicator 207SG025A). Is lit up and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the variable display based on the second hold for special figure is executed, and the second hold for special figure is 0. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided a total of three big hit types: a big hit A which is a 5 round big hit, a big hit B which is a 10 round big hit, and a big hit C which is a 15 round big hit. However, which of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

The effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin positions and the effect positions during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8(A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 8-8(B), the result of determination as to whether the variable display result is “out”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), or different EXT data is set according to a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit” and a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden probability) determination result as the winning determination result. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating the determination result as to whether the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination has a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

Command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 It is provided with a random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. The CPU 103 stores various data to be temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

FIGS. 8-9 are explanatory diagrams illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted in the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-9, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

8-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “out”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, and A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach variation pattern”), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out variation pattern”). In addition, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the outlier variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "outlier". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable reach display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number for determining the pattern type, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-10, the form in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 with out-of-normal reach, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern with out-of-normal reach is set, and when the set value that is set is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is produced. If the set value that is set as 3 is a variation pattern that results in non-reach deviation when executed twice, a pseudo continuous effect is performed three times and a variation pattern that results in super-reach deviation...

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-24, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11(A) and the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 8-11(B). Judgment table (setting value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-12(A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 8-12(B) (Setting value 2), first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 8-13(A), second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 8-13(B) Value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-14(A), and the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-14(B) ), a first special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 8-15(A), a second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 8-15(B), 8-16(A) first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6), FIG. 8-16(B) second special figure display result determination table (setting value 6), FIG. -21(A) big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIGS. 8-21(B), big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a general pattern variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. . The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value to the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value becomes in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the more advantageous value to the amusement hall side. Become.

8-11(A) to 8-16(B) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table uses the individual display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-11(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, the game state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-11(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are “Big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “Small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “Outside”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and 1020 to 1253 of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and 1020 to 1253 of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result are “Big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “Small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “Outside”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-13(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and 1020 to 1272 of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-13(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state. The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-described hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-14(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state. The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-14(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state. “Big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “Small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “Outside”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-15(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and among the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-15(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-16(A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state, among the above-described hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As shown in FIG. 8-16(B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal state or the time saving state, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are The “big hit” is assigned, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the “small hit”, and the other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), more determination values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state) are It is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, and setting is Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, 1/200 when the setting value is 6), the special map display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, 1/120 when the setting value is 5, and 1/100 when the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-16, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probable variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the shortened state is respectively changed according to each set value. Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the normal variation or the short-time probability to the probability of jackpot in the probability changing state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of changing the jackpot probability in the normal state or the shortening state is The ratio of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the shortened state at each set value is all constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the probability that is determined to control the special figure display result "small hit" to the small hit game state has the same value. The judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, FIG. 8-11(A), FIG. 8-12(A), FIG. 8-13(A), FIG. 8-14(A), FIG. 8-15(A), FIG. 8-16( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and is controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each of the second special figure display result determination tables, regardless of the game state and the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and is controlled to the small hit game state is the first special probability. The determination value is assigned so that it has the same value as that of the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, FIG. 8-11(B), FIG. 8-12(B), FIG. 8-13(B), FIG. 8-14(B), FIG. 8-15(B), FIG. 8-16( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and is controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/100.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as “small hit” regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the small hitting result may be different according to the set value. Further, the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hitting game state as "small hit" as the special hit display result is different according to the fluctuation special drawing, The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled may be the same probability regardless of the fluctuation special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination values assigned to “big hit” and “small hit” in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the first special figure display result determination table in the above case, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is 1238 to 1253 in the setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 in the setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 in the setting value 4, and 1238 to 1317 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346.

That is, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the possible hit judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the common big hit judgment values are common. Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1238 as a reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, when the setting value is 6, while 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit determination value is 32767-33094, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the range for the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-18, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the probability variation state, the range from 1024 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value for determining the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of a set value of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to continue from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is in the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, in the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, in the range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and in the range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probability change state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value range is included in the big hit judgment values. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probability change state, the hit determination value is the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, while 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 in the numerical range different from the big hit judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6 as 32767 as a small hit judgment value reference value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is 1238 to 1253 in the setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 in the setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 in the setting value 4, and 1238 to 1317 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the common big hit judgment values are Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1238 as a reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, when the setting value is 6, while 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit determination value is 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1024 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value for determining the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of a set value of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to continue from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is in the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, in the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, in the range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and in the range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probability change state, when the set value is 1, a value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the large numerical value is not included in the common numerical value range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probability change state, the hit determination value is the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, while 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit determination value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. As the judgment value included in the common numerical value range or the continuous numerical value range consisting of the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range as the numerical value range of the big hit judgment value, regardless of the gaming state and the set value, the hit judgment The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the continuous one numerical value range (common numerical value range) based on the value 32767 as the numerical value range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, when the variation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hitting determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hitting determination value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result determination table for the first special figure). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result being "big hit" is the highest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the set value is assigned the judgment value so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as "big hit" is set (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5>set value 4>set value 3>set value 2>set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol A to jackpot C) is decided. Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) and 8-16(B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B stop symbols in It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-21(A) and 8-21(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Among these, FIG. 8-21(A) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 8-21(B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 8-22. In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low accuracy high base state, and the big hit game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a probable variation big hit) are set to shift to the high-accuracy and high-base state.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, so the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hits A to C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2 You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when the big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability variation control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the setting value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the big hit control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as big hit B. The example that does not do, that is, that the jackpot type determination rate is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot type is not determined (determination rate is 0%). Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, there may be provided a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B. .

In this way, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game playability is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. While the gaming state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state on the basis of passing, the game characteristic (so-called V that the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map) If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game characteristics are the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a probable state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is predetermined, and the offset variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined that the variable display result is “offset” are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23(A) and 8-23(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (big hit B, big hit C) used when the big hit types are big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (big hit) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-23(A), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 is 1 Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 360 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 340 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 300 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-23(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is "2", 1 to 180 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", from the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 101 to 350 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. And the set values become lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination value is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super-reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, With the set values 1 to 6, the variation pattern of small hits may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, the variation pattern determination table A for deviation used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Variation pattern determination table B for deviation used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4, and variation for deviation used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state The pattern determination table C and the out-of-shift variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state where the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for outliers, the variation pattern of non-reach outliers without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of out of normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of outreach α out of reach (PA2-2), the super pattern A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-24(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for out-of-range (for one or less low-base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 430 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 350 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-correspondence corresponding to the total pending storage numbers of 2 to 4 are shown. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern with out-of-reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern with out-of-reach β (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been.

As shown in FIG. 8-24(B), in the out-of-range variation pattern determination table B (for low base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 1-500 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501-700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach β deviation (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “2”, 1 to 480 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", 1 to 440 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700. Is assigned to the variation pattern of out-of-normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of out-of-reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is variation pattern of out-of-reach β. (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-corresponding total storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern with out-of-reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern with out-of-reach β (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been.

As shown in FIG. 8-24(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for out-of-range (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3) and 531 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) with a deviation of super reach β from the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-24(D), in the variation pattern determination table D for out-of-range (for high base medium), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach. α is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) and 531 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “4”, 1 to 490 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1 to 4), and 491 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

As described above, when the deviation variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Are set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the deviation variation determination tables A to D are used, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of super-reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are variation of super reach β. If each variable pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of range, the super-reach variation pattern is determined with a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the staging effect from being deteriorated due to the variable display not being performed.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super-reach α deviation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super-reach β deviation are completely the same as the variation patterns for the deviation between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α deviation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β deviation are between the set values. May differ by a slight difference (for example, about 1%).

In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value being set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of out-of-reach α and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β are detected. Although the example in which both the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the determination rate of the deviation variation pattern and the determination rate of the super reach β may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value being set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of out-of-reach α and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β are detected. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value that is set.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that has been set. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. That is, if the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

It should be noted that the variation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is less reachable. The fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) of the outlier has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach variation pattern having a short variation time is determined, so that the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit of 4. When the number of reserved memories is reduced, it is less likely to generate useless starting prizes in which holding memory is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, non-reach fluctuation without shortening By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time is lengthened, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-24(A) to 8-24(C), fluctuations are made by using the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation which differs depending on the total number of pending storages. Although the mode for deciding the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the first The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol) the variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for deviation according to the number of pending storage numbers of the second special symbols).

Further, in each of the deviation variation pattern determination tables of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 6, the variation of the super reach deviation is generated. The ranges of random number values assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the out-of-range probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio in which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the out-of-reach (out-of-reach The appearance rate of the variation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the variable display is executed in a variation pattern of out-of-reach variation depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and considering the big hit probability and the outfall probability for each set value, the variable display is out of reach in the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be configured to be executed in the variation pattern of.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. 8-25 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

1st special figure reservation storage section 207SG151A, the game sphere passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize sphere device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning hole, and the first starting condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball is set. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. , And is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

Although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning hole formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has been generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B has not yet started. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B associates the winning number (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, and the numerical value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment, are used as the pending data. , And is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

In addition, the game ball has passed (entered) the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start port data indicating which of the first start winning port and the second start winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

The ordinary figure holding storage unit 207SG151C stores the holding information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 207SG151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The game control timer setting unit 207SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example effect control as shown in FIG. A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 8-26(A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 207SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 207SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 207SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, data forming the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-26B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. In the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total reserved storage numbers of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure being displayed in a variable manner are provided. Further, in the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4” corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total reserved storage numbers of the second special figure reserved storages. ") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designating command, variable category designation Four commands, that is, a command and a reserved storage number notification command (a first reserved storage number notification command or a second reserved storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A are these start mouth winning designation command, symbol designating command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage is ensured in association with the reserved storage number notification command.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest-order reserved storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. As described above, the storage contents of the buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” that stores the contents of the pending storage in which the start condition is satisfied are shifted to the upper position one by one, It is adapted to be cleared in the effect symbol variation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is stored in the first special figure hold storage and A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage.

Incidentally, in the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not decided in the prefetching notice setting process. , When the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, "1" (rectangle (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved storage display in a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode ) Is set, a reserved storage display of a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 207SG005U, and the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved storage display is displayed. On the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit and a high possibility of a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry having the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening. Then, at the time of a winning start to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entries corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the starting winning reception command buffer 207SG194A. Go At the time of starting winning, the commands from the starting opening winning award designation command to the reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start mouth winning award designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the tails "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage, respectively. , The symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning award received command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 8-26(B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display which is finished immediately before each time the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2" corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. -1”) and the stored contents of the entry after the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the variable display of the effect symbol of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". The commands that have been shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “3” and “4” are shifted to the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” becomes an area (entry) for storing each command relating to pending storage which is variably displayed at that time.

In the pre-reading notice setting process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, and the hold display flag is set. If there is an entry that does not exist, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation category command stored corresponding to the entry, and whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed. The display mode (display pattern) of the pending storage display is determined. When the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, the hold memory display mode is determined from a square (◇) and a star (☆), and when the hold display notice effect is not executed, the hold memory display mode is displayed. Is determined to be white. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the hold storage display is set in the hold display flag.

After the hold display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (see FIG. 8-52) to display the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D or the second hold storage display area. It will be displayed on the 207SG005U.

Note that the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect that can be decided to be executed in the look-ahead notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the pre-reading notice effect, for example, a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, a motion effect in which a movable body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates, etc. are suspended. An effect other than the display notice effect may be executable.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 on the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-27A, the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B) and FIG. 8-27(C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every 6000 balls out of the full game state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the second out-of-6000 ball normal state (low-probability low base state), and the third out-of-6,000-ball normal state in every gaming state (low-probability low base state) It is possible to display the base value 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display "bL." which is an abbreviation for the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The display color of each base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to "5" is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-30 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the setting value having a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process to be described later was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred during execution of the setting value changing process). It is determined whether or not (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008;Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008;N), 207SGSa010 is not executed and 207SGSa011 is executed. move on.

In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011;N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (whether to execute the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009)) ( 207SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e). To 207SGSa014 without executing.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a command at the time of recovery including the hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine is operated while the clear switch is operated. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processing of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above is executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

In addition, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 8-36(A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Notification of cold start is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to take a timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and interrupts are enabled (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 tells the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), recovery from power failure during setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a set value error and recovery from power interruption during setting change (error notification). , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk in the game hall, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B to execute the occurrence notification of the error.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the display monitor 207SG029, the first when the abnormal set value is set, or when the power is restored during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are executed to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. generates an error from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and sets the set value. It is possible to recognize that the power was cut off during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the gaming machine management device, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

In the game control main processing of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

FIG. 8-31(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is judged whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the flow proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area, as shown in FIG. 8-31(B). Of these storage areas, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and a second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 and later), special figure pending storage and general figure pending storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, last special symbol Stored are the setting values (determination used setting values) read out to set the display result determination table when determining a variable display result in normal processing. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change processing by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clearing process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

Note that the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

8-32 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments forming the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 8-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6) according to the setting value changing process. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any one of the setting values 1 to 6 is stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set to "1" (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any of 1^& is stored as the set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 102 is set based on the operation of the setting switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. A numerical value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the setting value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the borrowing setting. If the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. Store (207SGSa071), and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

8-33 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 8-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6) according to the set value confirmation process. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111;N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

Thus, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, among the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. Although the mode in which only one LED is turned on is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are jackpot A and jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), at the start of the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, an aspect corresponding to the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing is performed. As an example, an example is shown in which the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 can change the set value. The lights may be turned on in different modes at the start of the process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning ON the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value changing process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A) to FIG. 8-35(E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-27) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the setting value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D in this way, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the setting value confirmation processing is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A), FIG. 8-35(B) and FIG. 8-35(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-27) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for a game.

FIG. 8-34 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, first, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and if the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the CPU 103 executes the same power-off detection processing (207SGS200) as the above-described 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the start winning determination process of the main feature unit 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on a detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A. Or not (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (207SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special memories for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is “4”) (207SGS502). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, for example. When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in 207SGS502 (207SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503). .

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is “4”) (207SGS505). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value that is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in 207SGS505 (207SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). ..

After any of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506 is executed, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the value stored in the starting opening buffer is updated by adding 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second suspension storage count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

After executing the processing of 207SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination or the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data representing each random value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination and the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the variable display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is "big hit", and further the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is a "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used in the determination of the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, and will be described later. The variable display result determination module (207SGS525) that performs the determination is specified to determine the variable display result.

Subsequent to the processing of 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting mouth buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is controlled. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning award designation command is performed. The starting mouth winning designation command thus set is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

Following the process of 207SGS511, a winning random number determination process is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (207SGS513). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

After executing the processing of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the starting opening buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the processing proceeds to 207SGS504. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS516), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 8-40(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in 207SGS512 of FIG. 8-39 as the winning random number value determination process. In the feature portion 207SG, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S22 of FIG. 5, FIG. 8-41) described later causes the special symbol display result (variable symbol display). It is determined whether or not the result) is a "big hit" and is controlled in the big hit game state, and whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" is controlled in the small hit game state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the prize random number determination process of 207SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not it is determined to stop and display the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the predetermined display mode with super reach. To do. Thereby, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before the special drawing display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative design is the variable display mode is determined, and based on this determination result Then, the CPU 120 for effect control or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a hold display notice effect as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 8-40(A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152, etc. The current game state of machine 1 is specified (207SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is in the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies that it is in the time reduction state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the head address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, the starting opening buffer value and the set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 8-42, processing for determining whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “out” is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 is a numerical value indicating the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the set special display display result determination table and the specified random number value MR1 for the special display display result determination. The data is compared (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined as the “jackpot”.

When it is determined in 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if 207SGS572 determines that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS573), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by 207SGS509 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating is within a predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hitting determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the small hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined in 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit does not occur in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that there is a deviation in the variable display (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 8-40(A), it is confirmed whether or not the variable display is determined to be a big hit in 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and when it is determined not to be a big hit (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. It is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and when it is determined not to be a small hit, that is, when it is determined to be a deviation in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "a deviation. The transmission setting of the first symbol designating command, which is the symbol designating command according to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state. It is determined (207SGS528).

When it is determined in 207SGS526 that the jackpot is a variable display (207SGS526; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination random number MR2 and the jackpot type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. , Big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data forming the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designating command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designating command when it is a jackpot A, a third symbol designating command when it is a jackpot B, and a fourth symbol when it is a jackpot C. The transmission setting of the symbol designating command is executed (207SGS534), and then, as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern, a big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type is selected and set (207SGS535), and 207SGS536 is set. move on.

In addition, when it is determined that a small hit in the variable display in 207SGS527 (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "small hit". Is executed (207SGS531), the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (207SGS532), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

If the time saving flag is not set in 207 SGS 528 (207 SGS 528; N), the variation pattern determination table for deviation A is set and set (207 SGS 529 ), and if the time saving flag is set (207 SGS 528; Y). ), the variation pattern determination table for deviation D is selected and set (207SGS530). The out-of-shift variation pattern determination table A is an out-of-shift variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is two or less. The out-of-shift variation pattern determination table D is an out-of-transition variation pattern determination table used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A for deviation and the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation D, a fluctuation pattern determination for deviation used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 Although the table B and the variation pattern determination table C for dislocation used when the number of total pending storages is five or more are prepared in advance, as shown in FIG. In the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, in the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, the setting value 1 is 1 to 450, the setting value is 1 to 430, When the set value is 3, 1 to 410 are assigned, when the set value is 4, 1 to 390, when the set value is 5, 1 to 370, and when the set value is 6, 1 to 350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, for a non-reach variation pattern, within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, if the setting value is 1 to 500, the setting value is 1 to 480 when the value is 2, 1 to 460 when the setting value is 3, 1 to 440 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 420 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 4 when the setting value is 6. 400 are assigned respectively.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for deviation and the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, when the setting value is 1 in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for a non-reach variation pattern, 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned.

On the other hand, in each of the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of the super reach in the range that the random number value MR3 for the dynamic pattern determination can take, regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation variation pattern determination table A or the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the determination of the non-reach and the super reach changes the number of pending storages after the determination. Since the variation pattern is always non-reach or super-reach, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss in the determination at the time of starting winning. ..

After performing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, using each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, The variation category corresponding to the range of the determination value including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this characteristic unit 207SG, as shown in FIG. 8-40(B), when at least the variable display result is “out”, the variable display mode of “non-reach” is common regardless of the total number of pending storages. And a variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variation category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach or small hit), It is sufficient to determine whether or not the variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the winning random number determination process is ended.

The symbol designating command and the variation category designating command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing the command control process.

8-41 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as a special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (207SGS541). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, the second hold storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of second special figure reservation storages other than "0" is stored in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), it is regarded as the reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of 207SGS542, the second special figure pending storage number count value and the total pending storage number count value are decremented by 1 and updated, and the like, so that the second special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number are decremented by 1. And the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B are updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (eg, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the reservation number “1” in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B are set. The reserved data shown is shifted upward by one entry (207SGS543).

After that, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (207SGS544), and then the process proceeds to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of 207SGS545, if the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. Good. As described above, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined in 207SGS541 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and whether the first special figure pending storage number is "0" or not. To determine. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls have entered (passed) and the starting winnings have occurred. In this case, a table that stores data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

When the first special figure reservation storage number in 207SGS545 is other than "0" (207SGS545; N), as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of 207SGS546, the first special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number are updated by subtracting 1 from the first special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number. Thus, the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure holding storage unit 207SG151A are set. The reserved data shown is shifted up one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), the process proceeds to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, by confirming the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (207SGS549). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is in the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies that it is in the time reduction state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the head address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 8-31(B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used setting value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the judgment used set value is stored (207SGS551:Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is determined. It is determined whether or not the determination used set value stored is the same (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, when it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored determination used setting value are not the same (207SGS553:N), an error designation command according to the abnormality of the setting value is issued to the effect control board 12. The setting for transmission is performed (207SGS554), and the security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS555), and the loop is executed. Start processing. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so that the loop processing brings the pachinko gaming machine into a game-disabled state (game-disabled state). The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing the command control process.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment stores the set value (determination used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the head address of the RAM 102 at present. If the set values that are present are different, it is possible to recognize that the determined used set values and the set values currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different in the management device of the game hall, so that a pachinko game is possible. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing so as not to execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the CPU 103 does not limit the launch of the game balls, and does not perform the payout of the prize balls or the variable display of the special symbols even if the game balls enter each winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a game-disabled state by executing it.

Further, in the special symbol normal process of the feature unit 207SG, it is determined that the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different from each other, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the game hall. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (Fig. 8-36 ( B) or the display mode (lighting mode) as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk at the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the present characteristic portion 207SG, if the determination used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and game Although the example in which the security signal is output to the field management device only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and transmission of these error designation commands and output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed every predetermined period in the above-mentioned unplayable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal process of the feature unit 207SG, if the determination used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game-disabled state. Although the mode of controlling is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determination used set value and the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 causes the pachinko game to play. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 to be in the unplayable state.

Furthermore, when the determination used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different from each other and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the unplayable state, for example, a game hall. It is also possible to execute only the output of the security signal to the management device described above, or to reset and specify the set value stored in the head address of the RAM 102. When resetting the set value stored in the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the head address of the RAM 102, or the most disadvantageous value to the player (the book). By setting 1) in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined that the determination used set value is not stored in 207SGS551, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and the first variable display is executed (207SGS551:N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553 When it is determined that the determination used set value that is stored is the same (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, the starting mouth buffer value and the set value is selected. Set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed by the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-40A, that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 8-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display in 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and when it is determined that it is not the big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not it is determined in the variable display that the small hit is made in the 207SGS557. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When it is determined in 207SGS558 that the jackpot is a big hit in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the on state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 8-21(A) and (B) is selected and set as the use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuations, and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in the jackpot type determination table , "Big hit C" is determined according to which of the determination values assigned to each big hit type, the big hit type is determined as a plurality of types (207SGS563).

By determining the type of jackpot in the process of 207SGS563, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is ended, whichever of the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability variation state that is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state. Whether to control will be determined before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the type of big hit is "big hit A", it is "1", if it is "big hit B", it is "2", and if it is "big hit C", it is "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in 207SGS559 that a small hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the flow proceeds to 207SGS560 to set the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 to the on state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined in 207SGS559 that a small hit will occur in the variable display, that is, if there is a deviation in the variable display (207SGS559; N), the flow proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set), whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) Predetermined result, further, in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot gaming state, to set the confirmed special symbol. As an example, the special symbol indicating the symbol "-" which is the off symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol in correspondence with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "off". In addition, if the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" in 207SGS558, if the big hit type in "207SGS563" is "big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is determined. Set to. Further, when the big hit type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined in 207SGS559 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), advance notice that the special figure display result is "small hit" Corresponding to the determination result, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small hit symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as fixed special symbols.

After setting the definite special symbol in 207SGS565, after updating and storing the setting value specified in 207SGS553 in the RAM 102 as the judgment used setting value (207SGS566), the value of the special drawing process flag is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal process is ended.

If the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal The process ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, since the judgment used set value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 8-31(B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold started. When the first variable display is performed, the judgment used set value does not exist, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing the value in the area which has not been cleared by the RAM clear processing in the RAM 102, the determination used set value and the RAM 102 when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start. The set value stored in the first address of the (set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) may be compared.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 and 8-41, the variable display result determination module that executes the common process is used to determine the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module includes the setting value specified by the CPU 103 (the setting value stored at the head address of the RAM 102) and the determination used setting value. Controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIG. 8-41) and the setting value specified by the CPU 103 as the processing result and the determination used setting value do not match Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, the process of comparing the setting value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used setting value even when the winning random number determination process is executed, and the setting value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination use Since the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state can be executed when the set value does not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and also the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input process described later After the input of information is accepted, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, the number of big hits, (207SGS409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, etc., and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36(A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared. A notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of displaying the game effect lamp 9, emitting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related notification process for executing notification of being in operation (notification of setting value change) and notification of setting value confirmation (setting value confirmation notification) is executed (207SGS412).

In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-50(B) and FIG. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting variable is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state. In general, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and the clerk at the game hall or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in the state of doing. In other words, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value and the notification of the set value being confirmed, the pachinko game machine can be used by a clerk of the game hall who changes or checks the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is starting in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

The effect control CPU 120 also performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to be executed (see Fig. 8-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-47 and 8-48. FIG. 8-47 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the production control CPU 120. FIG. 8-48 is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 8B is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect positions (second position), and from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the returning movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

When the first movable body initializing process or the second movable body initializing process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332, that is, the movable body is movable. If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved for some reason (for example, it has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on a game island, or if the origin could not be restored during the previous operation (for example, when performing the production, the motor is removed). If the movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the origin return of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 could not be confirmed or cannot be operated due to adjustment, failure, catching, etc.), it was moved from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine. If the position is other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 8-32), the origin is returned. To execute the non-detection operation control. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 8-48A and 8-48B are control speeds set by the production control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the movable body 207SG321. , 207SG322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and the other movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section In the case where the mode is different between the other moving section and the other moving section (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or a case where the same moving section rises and falls, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 The actual operating speed of may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the movable bodies 207SG321 are different. , 207SG322 does not always have the same actual operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, the size, weight, and weight of each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 When there are differences in the operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 8-48(A), when performing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the production control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, the control is performed such that after accelerating from the origin position, decelerating and stopping at the effect position, and accelerating from the effect position, decelerating and stopping at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120, when executing an effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, is the first speed minimum speed (low speed) and the second speed higher than the minimum speed (high speed). Since each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of and, even when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled so as to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is even faster.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the operation is performed at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the operation is performed at the maximum speed. It will be described as one that operates.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration becomes the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG321, by controlling so as to be the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portions are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-48(B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be less than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic portion 207SG of the form, the speed is always the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation checking operation control), and is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation checking operation control. Control for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

In this case, it is unclear how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. Therefore, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position when it is operated at a control speed when accelerated, that is, at high speed, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion or move from a short distance. Since the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are returned to the origin position and their movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. should be operated at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, after performing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. Of the setting value or the setting value early change completion flag indicating that the confirmation of the setting value has been completed is determined (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS 417. When the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process of 207SGS416 is not executed and the process proceeds to 207SGS417.

In 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If it is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421) and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413. And a second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) that is the same process as 207SGS414, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) advances to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 8-49(A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). The setting value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started from the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. To execute. As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 8-49(A), the effect control CPU 120 sends a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing. When received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization processing and the second The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-49(B), of the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, only the first movable body initialization processing is finished and the effect control is performed. When the CPU 120 for use receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. When the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in a state where there is no such state, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It is like this.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-49(C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command at a timing at which the first movable body initialization processing is not yet completed. In this case, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initializing process that are being executed are performed. Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS 411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error specification command has been received (207SGS 425). .. When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification processing (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

As the error notification in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-50(D), if the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error identified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5, Good. In this way, the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the player has set an incorrect value as a set value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , The power is turned on again to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the power failure occurred while changing the set value, and the set value (determination used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the head address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that the set value is different from the set value. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and an error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated. There are two error notification processes.

Among these, regarding the error notification processing (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, an error that occurs when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (the CPU 103 executes the processing of 207SGSa031 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. 8-30). The image display apparatus 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted), and regarding the error notification processing (207SGS439) that can be executed after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely activated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error (reception of the error designation command transmitted by the special symbol normal process 207SGS554 of the CPU 103 shown in FIG. 8-41) that occurs after the startup of the Good.

As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-44, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, the player information (the player information While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is cleared. ) And set value information (any one of the values "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value changing state or the setting confirming state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated).

That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. There is.

Then, in 207 SGS 427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the notification. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ”, “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. When set, a decorative value is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial design at a higher rate than when a setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R is set depending on whether a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set or a set value unfavorable to the player (eg “1”) is set. The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 8-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four changes (207SGS428). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether there is a pachinko gaming machine 1, the activation notification mode is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-46, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It should be noted that the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds is The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R. It includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds. The output sound C is output, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a gaming machine management computer or each counter, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification when the above, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification is partly common. Although there is illustrated a mode (in both cases, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the start is started in the start, the cold start, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device 5). The message image is displayed at, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a signal may be output to the management device from the above-mentioned external output terminal).

Also, the notification mode in each device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are illuminated, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the opened state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (for the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. In many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting changing” is displayed on the image display device 5, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, as the setting value change notification, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The startup notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. The form in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as such initialization effects. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, in any of the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, is activated by cold start, is activated in the setting change state, and is activated in the setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes power-off detection processing (207 SGS 432 ). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 8-51, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal from the power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS441; N), the processing is ended, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS441; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 8-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot pattern determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving an input of player information, and a game. A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information, a performance information totaling process (207SGS438) for totaling performance information, and an error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. Then, it transfers to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the variable display, the big hit game, the number of fluctuations as the player information stored every time the super reach is executed, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko game machine is played. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variable display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103. When the error designation command is received, the error notification according to the received error designation command is executed.

Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-52, in the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after the read-ahead notice setting process (S161) is executed, it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U. The hold display update processing (207SGS454) is executed to update the number of hold storage displays and the display mode of the hold storage display that is performed according to the number of hold storages and the value of the hold display flag stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 207SG194A. In accordance with the effect control process flag, any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed.

In addition, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is "0" or "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is performed according to the effect control process flag. To S177 (see FIG. 7) and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetching restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), The hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed, and any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the activation, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the winning a prize determination process based on that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. 5) may not be executed, the execution of the prefetching notice effect may be restricted over the four variable displays.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the game progress based on the fact that the game is possible. The light amount of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the factory default state.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the look-ahead notice effect, For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an operation of a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an effect of causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light, or the like may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless of this, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical value range of the big hit determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), according to each set value from 1238. The range up to the specified value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common determination range and the non-common determination range of the jackpot determination value are set with 1020 of the determination determination value as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state, the value of the random number value MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical value range corresponding to each setting value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the advantageous state.

In particular, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to one place with the reference value of 1020 within the range of 0 to 65535, so that there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. Compared with the case where it is provided, it is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether to control in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, the above-described hit determination value Since 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value are set to be a continuous numerical value range, so it is determined whether or not the big hit game state is controlled. Is whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state and the time saving state, and from 1020 the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hitting determination value is determined according to whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values in the second special figure is 2 The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice the number. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). It is set.
For this reason, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hitting game state, the value of the random number value MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hitting determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it suffices to determine whether or not it is within, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the small hitting gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value that is set is 6, whether or not the big hit game state is controlled When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical value range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range corresponding to each set value, and the small hitting game state is controlled. When determining whether or not to make the determination, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hitting determination value according to the variation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control the small hit game state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-41, the CPU 103 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 each time variable display is started (every time when the variable display result of variable display to be started is determined). While reading out the set value that is present, set the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read setting value (set the display result judgment table according to the set value), and enter the jackpot gaming state. Whether to control or not is determined. That is, since the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 every time the variable display is executed and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value, the inappropriate set value is read by the inappropriate variable. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the setting value is read from the RAM 102 every time variable display is executed, and the display result determination table corresponding to the read setting value is set. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 may read the set value from the RAM 102 and set the display result determination table according to the read set value. . In addition, when setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 at the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time when the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and the read set value and the previous variable display result are read out. The set value read out from the RAM 102 (judgment used set value) for comparison is compared, and if the set value read out from the RAM 102 this time does not match the judgment used set value as the result of the comparison, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 8-50), it is possible to prevent the inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading the inappropriate set value. it can. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately specify that the inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the gaming machine recognize that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, the clerk at the game arcade can promptly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value and the determined used set value stored in the RAM 102 may be executed a predetermined number of times of variable display or based on the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the setting value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used setting value, and when the comparison result indicates that the setting value read from the RAM 102 and the determination used setting value do not match, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the inappropriate determination of the variable display result from being read.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 to 8-42, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module which is common when executing the winning random number determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is determined, a part of the process can be shared between the time of performing the winning random number determination and the time of performing the special symbol normal process, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, if the variation special diagrams are the same, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a small hit. Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the setting value read from the RAM 102 Since the display result determination table is set according to this), the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state can be reduced. Furthermore, like the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is shared. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, when 1 (the setting value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set. Since 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since it is not set, it is determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical value range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical value range of jackpot determination values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical value range of the big hit determination values. That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, an example is shown in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical value range of the small hit determination values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the small hit determination values.

Further, the present embodiment also includes Invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (eg, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32),
When it is in the setting state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (eg, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 8-33),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display section during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-37). In, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, and the display mode when the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, Different parts)
A gaming machine characterized by that is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the variable display section (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). (A part that lights up all the segments that configure the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be independently turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing that the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display unit is turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as a gaming machine described in means 6 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots a game medium to a gaming area (for example, a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game,
The information display unit includes a firing direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the firing direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), (The part where the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the launch direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 7 of Invention 207SG,
A holding storage unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
When the setting state or the confirmation state is set, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion that blinks all the segments that configure the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform a suitable notification on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion that lights only one of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the number-of-times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage unit (for example, an area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection unit when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is satisfied. While the game is being performed, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by the deletion of the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 8-31(A)) is executed. Is feasible,
A second condition (for example, a clear switch is ON and a lock switch) that includes a special state (for example, a clear switch ON state) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means. When 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial condition is executed when the first condition is satisfied. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a RAM clear processing and a setting value changing processing can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). (No part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization processing based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (eg, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(B)). In the case where an error more than the set value occurs, all segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink.)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display area in which the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined error is at least an error relating to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or more than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is set. It is possible to suitably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If an electric power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is settled, an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored occurs at the time of restoration from the power failure. Even if it does not exist, a display capable of specifying that an error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is cut off during the setting change as shown in FIG. Part to blink all the segments that make up the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to re-set the set value due to the occurrence of power failure before the set value is confirmed without newly setting an error. It can be suitably notified.

The present embodiment also includes invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and information display means for confirming the set value are provided. There is a problem in that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if these are individually provided. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information on the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 8-27(C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When it is displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit is displayed. (A part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information capable of specifying that an error has occurred in at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36(B), When the set value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-35(A) and FIG. 8-36(B)). As shown in FIG. 5, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are used for displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and for displaying the occurrence of the abnormal error. (Part using 207SG029D)
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored, and the error information is different from the set value information. Can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D is 8). Part consisting of individual segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
The information display means, when the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the information display means includes the small units constituting each display unit. All of the display parts are turned on to be in the all-lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36(A), the first display part 207SG029A, the second display part 207SG029B, the third display part 207SG029C, and the fourth display part). 207SG029D is a part that repeats all blinking and all extinguishing (flashing) of all the segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detecting means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-32, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the setting value can be confirmed quickly.

The form of the present embodiment also includes Invention 210SG shown below. In other words, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes the checking operation of the movable body based on the operation of changing the set value, there is, for example, the one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed during the change of the set value, the operator may overlook the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirming operation again after the setting value changing operation is completed. In this case, when the setting value changing operation is completed during the first movable body confirming operation, the changing operation is completed. There is a problem that a new confirmation operation of the movable body is started from the timing, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body operably provided (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322),
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When a specific condition is met, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which a setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, a clear switch and a lock switch are activated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49, the effect control CPU 120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body operably provided (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322),
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-32). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. From the timing of receiving the start notification command, a portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state is ended while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed during the return operation, which is executable before the control is executed, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation is completed (for example, the first movable state). (In the body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, the portion that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after the non-detection automatic operation control is completed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state ends if the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(C), the first movement based on the fact that the production control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body is newly added after the execution of the second movable body initialization processing. On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed according to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 49(B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command is completed, and the second movable body initialization is completed. When the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the processing, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly performed after the completion of the second movable body initialization processing. (The part that executes and in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 210SG,
A plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-transmitting initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies where the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, The confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(C), the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the On the other hand, a portion in which the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has ended does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state ends The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(B), the production control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value check start notification command). If the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization processing based on the above, the second movable body initialization processing is executed. (A part for newly executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in sequence after the end of)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

The characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary The embodiment is constituted by the symbol display 207SG020, the universal figure hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. There may be a case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether there is a setting value confirmation process or not. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state depending on whether the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are on or off. You can easily tell if there is.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by turning on all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state (lighting Aspect) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, if these first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to turn on some of the segments that constitute the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The example is one in which the lighting of one segment is performed and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked. Instead, in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, the first holding display 207SG025A and the second holding display 207SG025B are formed. The blinking of all the segments to be performed may not be executed or only a part thereof may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lit segments of the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. It may be.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an LED for error notification individually, and the LED may be turned on or blinking to notify that a setting value error has occurred.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The display monitor 207SG029 may not be provided in the machine 1. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. .

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization processing or a second movable body initialization processing is executed. Although the mode for deciding whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, Although the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set differently from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lit or blinked) during the game as long as it can inform that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. .

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during game" may include different blinking periods, brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control of each movable body and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by turning on or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in the vicinity of the game information display unit 207SG200) with an explanatory note that lighting or blinking is performed. By doing in this way, a clerk of the game arcade who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a first special symbol display device 207SG004A, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B, a first hold indicator 207SG025A, a second hold. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main processing of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, regardless of the game state and the set value, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical value of the small hit determination value (Range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, FIG. 8-53(A) and FIG. 8-53(B). As shown in, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the game state or the set value.

In addition, when the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 8-53(A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. And the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit determination value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hitting judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit determination value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is a reference value of the small hitting judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the game state is the probability change state, as shown in FIG. 8-53(B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1024 to 1346 and the small hit determination is made. The common numerical value range of values is shifted by an amount that the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is a small hit judgment value so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. Standard value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hitting judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

Further, as a mode in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical value range of the small hit determination value) are set to be continuous, as shown in FIG. The numerical range of the small hitting judgment value is set to a range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the trailing end of the numerical value which the hitting judgment value can take), and the large hitting judgment value is set to be continuous to the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value. The common numerical value range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to be continuous to the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is changed according to the set value. Therefore, the jackpot probability may be changed according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value as shown in FIG. 8-54, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1 when judging the variable display result. Is greater than or equal to the minimum jackpot determination value (64990 for setting value 1, 64974 for setting value 2 and 64954 for setting value 3 in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8-54). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is changed by further determining whether the random number value MR1 is 65208 or more, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It may be determined whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By performing the variable display determination in this way, the variable display result is determined without performing both the determination whether the variable display result is a big hit and the determination whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 8-53 and 8-54, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (the big hit judgment value when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1) Of the common numerical value range and the common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to 2 to 6 as the setting value, the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value and the non-common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set so as to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical value range. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, and thereby the large hit game state or the small hit game state. It can be determined whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is judged whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or more than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value, thereby the big hit game. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the large hitting game state or not, and whether to control the small hitting game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-53, when the game state is controlled by the CPU 103 to the probability variation state, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical value range from the jackpot reference value 1020, and the jackpot determination value increased. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit determination values increases, or the small hit game state. Since it is only necessary to determine whether to control, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 that determines whether to control the jackpot gaming state and the processing load that determines whether to control the jackpot gaming state. be able to.

Further, also in the form shown in FIGS. 8-53 and 8-54, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, since the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is not set, The CPU 103 only needs to determine whether to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, so that the processing load of the CPU 103 to determine whether to control the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-53 and 8-54, a mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is illustrated. However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value are continuously set is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and As shown in 8-55 and FIG. 8-56, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical value ranges.

Incidentally, when the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical value ranges as described above, as shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value is different from the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value, and the non-common numerical value range when the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6 (the judgment included in the non-common numerical value range) In a numerical range different from the numerical range having the largest number of values), the numerical range continuous from the reference value of the small hitting judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 8-55, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 8-56, both cases) The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In the forms shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the reference value of the small hitting judgment value is common according to the variation special figure, while the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value. Although the number is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference range of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the variation special figure. And may be the same.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a different numerical value from the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical value range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range (60,000-60016 for the setting value 2, 60,000-60035 for the setting value 3... It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in accordance with the change of the setting value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether to control the big hit game state and for determining whether to control the small hit game state.

In particular, for the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as a reference value regardless of the set value, so that the CPU 103 is a jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the game state.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, like the above-mentioned characteristic part 207SG, when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set. Since it is not set, the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether to control the big hit game state only in the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the big hit game state. The processing load to perform can be reduced.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). In other words, the numerical range of the small hitting determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, so that the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether to control the small hit game state.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the pachinko game is set. When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when the set value of 2 or more is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set value is corresponding to each set value. Although the form in which the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common hit value is not set. You may set a common numerical range. Even when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to 1 in this manner, when setting the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the same reference as in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56 is used. The range from the value 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the big hit judgment value is set as the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes larger. By increasing the non-common numerical value range, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, when the variation special chart is the first special chart, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value. That is, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range with the same value as a reference, although the number of determination values included according to the variation special map is different. It is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state with 32767, which is the same value in the case of 1 special map and the case of the second special map, as a reference value. The processing load for determining whether or not it can be reduced.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-55 and 8-56, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although the mode for determining whether to control the small hitting game state based on the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 causes the big hitting game state by a method other than that shown in the characteristic portion 207SG. It may be determined whether or not to control in a small hit game state. For example, the value of the random number MR1 may be calculated, and it may be determined based on the value of the calculation result whether to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Further, the value of the random number MR1 is calculated, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum of the hit determination value) based on whether or not it is a big hit game state or a small hit game. It may be determined whether to control the state.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 9A, the same processing as that in FIG. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start processing (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. After the game stop start processing, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 8-32 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 8-32 is executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. 9-2, the same processing as that in FIG. 8-33 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 8-33 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 8-33 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the counting of these timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain variation state based on passing through a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of a sensor for detecting the V probability change) and is controlled to an open state and a closed state. In the V-probable variation game machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. Such an area where the V lid is in an open state is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 is a gaming ball that has passed a predetermined switch after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state (the player enters the special winning opening and closes the predetermined winning opening just before closing the special winning opening door). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state by the electric Chu opening time timer. ..

The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure variation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process of invalidating various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, a process of invalidating detection of various errors, It includes a process for invalidating the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is ended. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power-chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. And stops the time measurement of the attacker opening time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmed state is subtracted to advance the game. Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period between round intervals timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the interval between rounds, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the completion, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

As shown in FIG. 9-1 to FIG. 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 to FIG. 9-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled in the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and thus the valid period of the electric chew opening time timer And stops the time measurement of the valid period of the power cable open time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display is being executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 to FIG. 9-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the general-use variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled while the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare production being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed. Based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirming state. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
The characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.

The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) It may be applied to a game machine (mixture of one and two kinds) in which When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is determined to be valid. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirming state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the same control is executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, the special figure variation time timer is stopped based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in a display error, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. .. In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviating display result does not cause a disadvantage to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, the symbol stop period is not stopped during the execution of the variable display of the deviation, without stopping the timing of the special figure variation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions relating to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarts the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, further comprising a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
A normal variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that clocks the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting gaming state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In the special state, further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 for measuring a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 11F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarts the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, further comprising a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
A normal variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that clocks the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting gaming state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In the special state, further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 for measuring a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, CPU 103 that clocks with a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarts the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the fact that it is finished, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the time when the next variable display is started. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, further comprising a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
A normal variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that clocks the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting gaming state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In the special state, further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 for measuring a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 13F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived. ,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
An ordinary variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that measures by a universal figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarts the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the fact that it is finished, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the time when the next variable display is started. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, further comprising a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting gaming state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In the special state, further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 for measuring a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. The characteristic unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise may be generated due to static electricity or the like during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 10-1 is a diagram exemplifying an effect control command in the characteristic unit 40F in the present embodiment. In FIG. 10-1, some of the effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 8-8(A) described above. The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands showing the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not to be a big hit among the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 10A are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103. By receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on fluctuation pattern specification command)
Based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform variable display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small symbol of a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variable display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

(Regarding the processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As the variable display symbols, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the ordinary symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is changing, for example, it is fluctuated by a certain operation in a mode that is always visible in a display device such as the image display device 5. Is displayed. By the variable display of the fourth symbol, an effect such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment is performed, or the movable body displays all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display. The effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(About processing based on the designated command during the opening of the special winning opening)
During the big hit game, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), so that it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command.

(Regarding the processing based on the first start mouth winning designation command and the second start mouth winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start opening winning award designation command, whereby the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Display the hold display corresponding to. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer stored in the RAM 122 stores the second result. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About the processing based on the symbol designating command and variation type designating command)
Based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect and a winning change change effect. The winning flash effect is an effect of causing a lamp provided around the first start opening to emit light when a start winning occurs. The effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the winning flash effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the production control CPU 120 emits red light for those with a high expectation of a big hit, emits white light for those with a low expectation of hit, and missed variations in the lottery or out-of-range fluctuations without reach. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation together with the winning flash effect. In addition, you may control not to output sound only by light emission.

The winning-time hold change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for winning change hold effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Then, when the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, red, green, and blue hold displays are displayed in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of being out of the lottery or out of change without reach. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning pending change effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by a hold change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to emit light based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command to execute the winning-time pending change rendering. It should be noted that only one of the winning flash effect and the winning pending change effect may be executed. Further, at the time of winning the prize, the effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting the sound.

Next, the effect control main processing executed in the characteristic unit 40F will be described. FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 40F. In FIG. 10-2, the same processes as those in FIG. 8-43 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is partially omitted. In FIG. 10-2, the processing regarding 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIG. 8-43 is deleted, and the sub-side game stop processing is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related notification process for executing notification of being in operation (notification of setting value change) and notification of setting value confirmation (setting value confirmation notification) is executed (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing the sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process shifts to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern by operating the image display device 5 or the variation display of the small symbol at all times. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. When it is determined that the special winning opening opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. If it is determined that the command for opening the special winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby updating the display of the number of rounds during the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designating command is received. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120, by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the winning-pending change effect by operating the image display device 5. .. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning-at-end change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted from the device for sending a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the game machine at the time of factory shipment to the effect control board 12. .. When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform a predetermined operation based on the reception of a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 10C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received, the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received, the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designating command even if the special winning opening opening designating command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Control based on reception of the special winning opening opening designated command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designation command even if the special winning opening opening designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. Control based on reception of the special winning opening opening designated command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120, when being controlled to the setting change state, receives the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command, the first starting winning a prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120, while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, receives the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command, the first starting award winning. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting change state is set, and the reception of the setting value confirmation start notification command Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to show that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 10C, the control according to the test command is executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 40F is demonstrated.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the analysis of the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may send an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded.
Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when the control based on the effect control command is not executed even when the effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting check is received when the setting change state or the setting check state is controlled. explained. However, the processing based on the reception of the effect control command may be internally executed while the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, the control executed when being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of the other effect control command. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, channels other than the channel outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed. However, when the command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning are described as the predetermined effect means that is operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any one as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, the operation means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, commands for executing these operations are received during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, control to discard the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You may control not to do it.

In the above-described embodiment, a lamp provided in the gaming machine may be caused to emit light or sound may be output from a speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that the effect means does not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designating command or the variation type command is executed. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when the command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern is executed. You may make it perform a notice production based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation type command being received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various types of advance notice may not be executed by determining that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of determining whether the advance notice is actually executable. In addition, when executing the pre-reading notice production in continuous variable display other than when winning, the notice lottery is executed based on receipt of the symbol designating command and variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the advance notice, the advance notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the process of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). By doing this, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a restriction may be imposed so that another irregular command is not received thereafter. Good.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature portions combined in this way or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to other feature portions.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above (description regarding the characteristic part 207SG), in the gaming machine in which the setting value can be changed, the variation display executed after being controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a high base state) It is characterized in that the ratio of the fluctuation patterns to be selected differs depending on the number of times.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display result determination table referred to in the low accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F, a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 sets the set set value (1 to 6). Any of the above) is referred to and the big hit determination is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball-out rate) is changed. The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random number value for determining a special figure display result is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of low probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is When it is targeted for variable display, it hits big with a lower probability (1/199.8) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is supposed to win. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/199.8) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of uncertain variation, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/188.3) than when it is "1". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, a big hit is won with the same probability (1/188.3) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of low probability, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/178.1) than in the case of "1" or "2". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is arranged to win the big hit with the same probability (1/178.1) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1(D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of low probability, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/164.7) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is arranged to win the big hit with the same probability (1/164.7) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of low probability is used, if the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/149.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/149.3) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of low probability, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/134.0) than in the case of “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/134.0) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set when the variable display is about to be started in the low-probability state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIG. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11-1(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

FIG. 11-2 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 11-2 (A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 sets the set set value (1 to 6). Any of the above) is referred to and the big hit determination is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of high probability, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is When it is set as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of high probability, if the variable special map designation buffer is the first, the set value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/47.1) than when it is "1". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/47.1) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of high probability, if the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/44.5) than in the case of "1" or "2". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/44.5) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of high probability is used, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/41.2) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/41.2) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of high probability, if the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/37.3) than in the case of “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/37.3) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of high probability, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/33.5) than in the case of “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/33.5) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is started in the high-accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIG. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. In addition, "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-2(A) to (F) indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result judgment tables shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, but the big hit judgment table is separately provided. Provision, the determination of the big hit may be performed by using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. ..

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Big hit type judgment)
FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 11-3(B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101. It is an explanatory view showing a determination table (for the second special symbol). Of these, FIG. 11-3 (A) uses the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 11-3 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is “3R normal jackpot [50 times]”, "3R normal big hit [100 times]", "5R normal big hit [50 times]", "5R normal big hit [100 times]", "10R normal big hit [50 times]", "10R normal big hit [100 times]", It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of "3R probability variation big hit [next time]", "5R probability variation big hit [next time]", and "10R probability variation big hit [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature part 21TM of the present embodiment will be described. In the feature portion 21TM of the present embodiment, as a type of big hit, "normal big hit" (also called uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to shift to the low accuracy/high base state, and the big hit After the end of the game, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control are executed, and the "probability variation big hit" is set to shift to the high-accuracy/high base state.

The big hit game state by "3R big hit" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed three times (so-called 3 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player, and "5R The big hit game state by "big hit" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "10R big hit" is a normally open big hit which is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the jackpot game state by "normal jackpot [50 times]" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), or a special figure of the predetermined number of times. The time saving control that is ended by entering the big hit game state before the game is executed and is executed after the end of the big hit game state by "normal big hit [100 times]" is a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) The special figure game of 1 is executed, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed, and the game ends.

On the other hand, the high-probability control and the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state of "probability variation big hit [next time]" are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is one of the types of "3R certainty change big hit [next time]", "5R certainty change big hit [next time]", and "10R certainty change big hit [next time]", the big hit game state ends. Since the high-accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again later, the big hit game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, that is, a so-called condominium state.

For example, in the big hit game state by "3R normal big hit [50 times]", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated three times (so-called three rounds) normally. It is an open big hit, and after the big hit game state is over, the low-probability/high base state is entered, and the time saving control executed thereafter is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when the jackpot game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In addition, the big hit game state by "10R probability change big hit [next time]", the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous to the player, 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds), which are repeatedly executed normally open. It is a big hit, and it shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state after the end of the big-hit game state, and the high-precision control and time saving control executed thereafter continue until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big-hit game state. It is a type of jackpot to be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 21TM of the present embodiment, a mode in which nine types are provided as the big hit type is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 8 types or less, or 10 types. You may provide more than one kind.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. ~ 176 are assigned to "3R regular big hit [50 times]", 177 to 179 are assigned to "5R normal big hit [50 times]", and 180 to 290 are assigned to "3R probability variable big hit [next time ], 291 to 293 are assigned to “5R certainty variation big hit [next time]”, and 294 to 299 are assigned to “10R certainty variation big hit [next time]”. When the set value is "2" to "6", the same judgment value as that when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 134 are assigned to the "3R regular jackpot [100 times]", 135 to 164 are assigned to the "5R regular jackpot [100 times]", and 165 to 179 are assigned to the "10R regular jackpot." [100 times]”, 180 to 203 are assigned to “3R probability variable big hit [next time]”, 204 to 263 are assigned to “5R probability variable big hit [next time]”, 294 Up to 299 are assigned to the "10R probability variation big hit [next time]". When the set value is "2" to "6", the same judgment value as that when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the big hit type judgment table regardless of which setting value is set. ing. Similarly, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the big hit type judgment table regardless of which setting value is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a game state, a low probability state and a low base state (low probability/low base state: normal state) and a low probability state and high base state (low probability/high base state) : There is a case where it is controlled to a time-saving state) and a case where it is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state (high-probability/high-base state: probable variation state).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, within the 50 variations after the jackpot gaming ends when the high setting value is set (the The ratio of the next big hit in one period) is higher than the ratio of the next big hit within 50 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big hit game when the set value is low. In addition, when the big hit game state is controlled on the basis of the variation display result of the first special symbol, when the high setting value is reached, the next big hit does not occur after the big hit game is over and after 51 variations (second period) The rate of plunging into is lower than the rate of plunging after 51 fluctuations (second period) without the next big hit occurring after the end of the big hit game when the set value is low.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, within the 100 fluctuations (first period) after the big hit game ends when the high setting value is set, The jackpot occurrence rate is higher than the next jackpot occurrence rate within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the jackpot game ends when the set value is low. Further, when the big hit game state is controlled on the basis of the variation display result of the second special symbol, when the high setting value is reached, the next big hit does not occur after the big hit game is finished, and 101 fluctuations (second period) The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after 101 fluctuations (second period) without the next big hit after the big hit game ends when the set value is low.

(Relationship between game state and production design and production mode)
First, each game state (low probability / low base state: normal state, low accuracy / high base state: time saving state, high accuracy / high base state: probability change state), each production design (decorative design, first small design, The second small symbol), and the relationship between each effect mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed in the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5, which are smaller than the decorative symbols, and whether or not the special symbols are variably displayed and the display result of the special symbols are displayed. Is called a small design. The variable display of small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of special symbols, and the stop display of small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of special symbols. Then, from the left, the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, the area in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped. And the first small symbol display area 5r1, the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display and stopped, the area of the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 is the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left, The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 have a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 have a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small design is lower than that of the decorative design, and the visibility of the second small design is lower than that of the decorative design.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a decorative design, a small design, and a background image corresponding to the game state. In the present embodiment, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Here, there is a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is different depending on the game state.

As the gaming state in the present embodiment, as described above, a low certainty/low base state (sometimes referred to as a normal state), a low certainty/high base state (sometimes referred to as a time saving state), and a high certainty/ There is a high base state (sometimes referred to as a probability variation state). Then, when the game state is controlled to (i) low accuracy/low base state (normal state), the decorative symbol corresponds to the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the game state is controlled to (ii) low-accuracy/high-base state (time saving state), (iii) high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), whichever case Also, the decorative design corresponds to the second special design.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the case of (ii) to (iii), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "special figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "special figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

FIG. 11-4(A) shows that the gaming state is a low probability/low base state (normal state), the decorative design and the first small design correspond to the first special design, and the second small design is the second. It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it corresponds to a special symbol. Further, FIG. 11-1 (B), the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol corresponds to the second special symbol, the first small symbol is It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it corresponds to a 1st special symbol. Further, FIG. 11-4 (C1) and (C2), respectively, the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state), and the decorative design and the second small design correspond to the second special design. , Is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first small symbol corresponds to the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 21TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold displays 21TM010) is provided. In the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a second hold display area 21TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold displays 21TM020) is provided. Further, in the lower center part of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 21TM030 which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and is also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed is displayed. An active display area 21TM031 is provided.

Further, a first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number is provided in the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display region 21TM011). A second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided in the right part of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 21TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 for displaying the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol are provided. A second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5.

Here, a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first number of pending storages are displayed in the first pending display area 21TM011, and a number of second pending storages is displayed in the second pending display area 21TM021. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 displays the first reserved storage number numerically, and the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 displays the second reserved storage number numerically. It The display range of the objects in the first reserved display area 21TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, and the first reserved display area 21TM011 has the first reserved memory number It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 21TM015. Further, the display range of the objects in the second reserved display area 21TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 has the second reserved memory number 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 21TM025.

Further, in the first hold display area 21TM011, when the game state is (i) the low certainty/low base state (normal state), the number of objects corresponding to the first hold storage number is displayed, but the game state The object itself is not displayed when is either (ii) a low accuracy/high base state (time saving state) or (iii) a high accuracy/high base state (probability change state). Thus, in the first hold display area 21TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the game state (when the game state is any of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, the player confirms the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 even in the gaming state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011, The first number of reserved memories can be grasped.

Further, in the second hold display area 21TM021, when the game state is either (ii) low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) or (iii) high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) , The number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number is displayed, but when the game state is (i) the low probability/low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. In this way, the second hold display area 21TM021 displays objects corresponding to the second hold storage number according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, the player can confirm the second reserved storage number by checking the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 even in the gaming state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. You can

Further, in the active display area 21TM031, regardless of the game state, the object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. ing.

The example shown in FIG. 11-4(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/low base state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, the first reserved memory number is 3, and when the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 displays "3", the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 displays "0", and the first reserved display area 21TM011 displays three first storage areas. The hold display 21TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 21TM031, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbols (first symbol) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variation display of the information corresponding to 1 special symbol) is being executed, and the variation display result of the second special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”, The combination (“245” in this example) of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the 2 small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 continues. Is displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-4(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state). When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to be "chance time". When the production mode is "chance time", the background image of the decorative pattern is an "evening image" that represents the evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains, and the words "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. Will be displayed.

In this example, the first reserved memory number is 0, and when the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 displays "0", the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 displays "3", and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays three second storage areas. The hold display 21TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 21TM031, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the information (corresponding to the first special symbol which is a symbol) is executed, and the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "out of sync". Then, the combination of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 (“134” in this example) ) Is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2.

FIGS. 11-4 (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the screens of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, after the game state transitions to the high-accuracy/high-base state) Until the special figure game is executed 50 times or 100 times, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed, the gaming state is in the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state). ), the effect mode is controlled to the “chance time”. As described above, when the production mode is “chance time”, the “evening image” representing the evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and “ The word "Chance time" will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C2), after the game state has transitioned to the high-accuracy/high-base state, a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without becoming a jackpot game state. When the special figure game is executed, it is controlled to a production mode called "FEVERZONE". When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" representing a landscape of a typhoon including clouds, wind and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and "FEVERZONE" in the center of the screen is displayed. The characters will be displayed.

In the present embodiment, until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), or the predetermined The period until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the number of special figure games is executed is referred to as a first period. In addition, after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state, a period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without being in the big hit game state (book In the example, 51 times or more or 101 times or more) is referred to as the second period.

In addition, after the game state shifts to the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 or 100 times), or the special number of times of the special figure game is executed. The period until the jackpot gaming state before the figure game is executed will be referred to as the first period as in the high-accuracy/high-base state. On the other hand, after the game state shifts to the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without becoming the big hit game state. The subsequent period (in this example, the period after 51 times or 101 times and after the low probability/low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (C1), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3. Further, the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 displays "0", the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 displays "3", and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays three second storage areas. The hold display 21TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 21TM031, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the information (corresponding to the first special symbol which is a symbol) is executed, and the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "out of sync". Then, the combination of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 (“134” in this example) ) Is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (C2), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 3. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the information (corresponding to the first special symbol which is a symbol) is executed, and the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "out of sync". Then, the combination of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 (“134” in this example) ) Is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2.

In the present embodiment, during the period in which the effect mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE" (second period), the second hold display area 21TM021 displays the second hold display even when the second hold storage number is 1 or more. 21TM020 is not displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the active display area 21TM031 does not display the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol), The rectangular object itself showing the active display area 21TM031 is not displayed either.

This is because in the second period, until the variable display (variable display according to the variation pattern of the direct jackpot) is executed in which the display result is “big hit”, the variable display with a very short variable display period (high-speed variation) continues. This is because it is executed. When such high-speed fluctuations are continuously executed, in order to make the player surely recognize the display result of each fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) It is necessary to pay attention to the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in which is executed. Therefore, in the second period, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, and the player's consciousness is directed toward the display result of the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) currently being executed.

Not limited to such a form, when the effect mode is "chance time" (during the first period), the hold display and the active display are not displayed, and when the effect mode is "FEVERZONE" (first During the two periods), the hold display or the active display may be displayed.

(Game flow)
FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) corresponding to the gaming state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect modes.

The gaming state is controlled to a low accuracy/low base state (normal state), the variable display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal big hit", When any of the "5R normal big hit", "10R normal big hit", "3R certainty change big hit", "5R certainty change big hit", and "10R certainty change big hit", the big hit game state is controlled. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", the gaming state is in the low accuracy/high base state (time saving State) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", the gaming state is the high precision/high base state after the big hit gaming state ends. (Probably changed state), and the effect mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the gaming state is controlled to a low accuracy/high base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", the variation display is started, and the variation display result is "3R normal big hit. , "5R normal big hit", "10R normal big hit", "3R certainty big hit", "5R certainty big hit", and "10R certainty big hit", the big hit game state is controlled. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", the gaming state is in the low accuracy/high base state (time saving State) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", the gaming state is the high precision/high base state after the big hit gaming state ends. (Probably changed state), and the effect mode is controlled to "chance time".

The gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state), and the variation display is started when the production mode is controlled to "chance time", and the variation display result is "3R normal jackpot. , "5R normal big hit", "10R normal big hit", "3R certainty big hit", "5R certainty big hit", and "10R certainty big hit", the big hit game state is controlled. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", the gaming state is in the low accuracy/high base state (time saving State) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", the gaming state is the high precision/high base state after the big hit gaming state ends. (Probably changed state), and the effect mode is controlled to "chance time".

Until the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy/high-base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", and then the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example). When the big hit does not occur, the game state shifts from the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state), and the effect mode shifts from the chance time to the normal mode. ..

Specifically, after the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time"), a predetermined number of special symbols (50 times or 100 times) By the end of the variable display, the variable display result of the special symbol is "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", "10R normal big hit", "3R certainty big hit", "5R certain big hit", and "10R certain big hit" If none of the display results of "," the game state shifts to the low-probability/low-base state in response to the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) variable display (or the game state is high). A suggestion effect (in this example, a continuous challenge effect in a failure mode) that indicates a certainty/high base state and that the high certainty/high base state is maintained is executed. Then, at the timing when the variable display for the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) has ended, the gaming state falls from the low-probability/high base state (time saving state) to the low-probability/low base state (normal state), and From the variable display of, the production mode becomes the normal mode.

Until the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state) and the production mode is controlled to the "chance time", and then the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example). If no big hit occurs, the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) continues, and the effect mode shifts from "chance time" to "FEVERZONE".

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time"), a predetermined number of special symbols (50 times or 100 times) By the end of the variable display, the variable display result of the special symbol is "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", "10R normal big hit", "3R certainty big hit", "5R certain big hit", and "10R certain big hit" If none of the display results of "," the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state and the high-accuracy/high-base state is maintained, corresponding to the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) variable display. Suggestion effect (in this example, continuous challenge effect of success mode) that suggests that the game state is changed (or the game state shifts to the low certainty/low base state) is executed. Then, even after the variable display for the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) is completed, the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability-changed state) continues, and the effect mode is changed to "FEVERZONE" from the next variable display.

In this way, after the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example), or the predetermined number of times. The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the big hit game state is reached before the special figure game is executed. In addition, after the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example), or the special state game of the predetermined number of times is executed. The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

That is, when the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/low-base state (time saving state) after the jackpot game is finished, or when the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) Even in the game state, the production mode is controlled to "chance time", so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. Will be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/low-base state (time saving state) and when the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state), It becomes possible to share the effects for one period, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the currently controlled game state. In addition, even when the gaming state is controlled to a low-accuracy/low-base state (time saving state), by giving the player a sense of expectation that the gaming state is a high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), the gaming state It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when is in the low accuracy/low base state (time saving state).

(Fluctuation pattern determination)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for deviation that is used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is “off” and the variable display result is “big hit” And a jackpot variation pattern determination table to be used when is determined in advance.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state), and the gaming state is controlled to the high certainty/high base state (certain variation state). The fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to during the operation will be described. For each gaming state, when the variable display result is preliminarily determined to be “out”, the variation pattern determination table for deviance and when the variable display result is predetermined to be “big hit” It is assumed that a big hit variation pattern determination table to be used is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation, fluctuation patterns of “non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)”, “non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)” fluctuation pattern, “normal reach deviation” fluctuation pattern, and “super reach deviation” fluctuation pattern For each variation pattern of the pattern, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period is 1 second when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)” and the fluctuation display period is determined to be “non-reach deviation (short fluctuation)”. The variable display period is 5 seconds, the variable display period is 30 seconds when it is determined to be the “normal reach out” variation pattern, and the variable display period is 60 when the “super reach is out” variation pattern is determined. Seconds.

For the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out (fast fluctuation)" and the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out (short fluctuation)", the reach is not established after the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display result becomes "lost". This is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative patterns indicating that is stopped and displayed. Here, while the fluctuation display period is 5 seconds when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)". In this case, since the variable display period is 1 second, if there is a pending storage and it is determined that the variation pattern is “non-reach loss (high-speed variation)”, the variation pattern is “non-reach loss (shortened variation)”. The reserved memory can be consumed at a shorter interval than when the determination is made.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is provided for each variation pattern of “direct jackpot”, “normal reach jackpot” variation pattern, and “super reach jackpot” variation pattern. A predetermined random number value in the possible range is assigned as the determination value.

In the present embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of “direct jackpot” is 10 seconds, and the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of “normal reach jackpot” is 30 seconds. The variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot" is 60 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of “direct jackpot” is a variation in which a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the variation display result is “big hit” is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach after the variation display is started. It is a pattern. Since the production that achieves the reach is not executed, the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of "big hit" is the other variation that executes the production that achieves the reach when the variation display result is "big hit". It is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern ("normal reach jackpot", "super reach jackpot").

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern involving normal reach (“normal reach out” and “normal reach jackpot”), after the reach state is established, the final display result is obtained without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. Fixed stop.

In the present embodiment, in a variation pattern involving super-reach (“super-reach miss” and “super-reach jackpot”), after a reach state is established, a ally character and an enemy character battle as a super-reach effect. A battle effect that notifies whether or not the jackpot is won is executed. Then, when the final display result is "big hit" (when the big hit symbol is fixedly stopped), an effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed, and when the final display result is "off edge" (off edge symbol) Is fixedly stopped), an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

FIG. 11-6(A) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding final fluctuation]. This first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is the first period (the period of the special figure game 50 times after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the second special symbol) From the period of 100 special drawing games after the variable display result becomes "big hit"), the final fluctuation of the first period described above (in this example, the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit") After the 50th special drawing game, or the 100th special drawing game after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a "big hit") (ie, the variable display of the first special symbol) It is the period of 49 special drawing games after the result is "big hit", or the period of 99 special drawing games after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit") is there. Here, in FIG. 11-6(A), FIG. 11-6(A1) is a diagram showing an example of the deviation variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 11-6(A2) is a jackpot variation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the first period when the gaming state is a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) [excluding final fluctuation], and the first period when the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) With [Excluding final variation], when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be “out”, the variation pattern determination table of “for out” which is common in any game state (FIG. 11-6 (A1)) ), the variation pattern will be determined. Also, the first period when the gaming state is a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) [excluding final fluctuation] and the first period when the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) With [Excluding final variation], when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "big hit", a variation pattern determination table (for big hit) common in any gaming state (Fig. 11-6 (A2)) ), the variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A1), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 750 are included in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Non-reach loss (shortened variation)” variation patterns are assigned, 751 to 900 are assigned to “normal reach loss” variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are assigned to “super reach loss” variation patterns. Has been. Further, in any of the setting values “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, as in the case where the setting value is “1”, the judgment value of the MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 750 are assigned to the variation pattern of “non-reach deviation (shortening variation)”, and 751 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of “normal reach deviation”, 901 to Up to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “out of super reach”. As described above, in the first period excluding the final fluctuation, when the display result is “out”, the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 20 of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are “ It is assigned to the variation pattern of “direct jackpot”, 21 to 50 is assigned to the variation pattern of “normal reach jackpot”, and 51 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot”. Further, in any of the setting values “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, as in the case where the setting value is “1”, the judgment value of the MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 20 are assigned to the variation pattern of "direct jackpot", 21 to 50 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 are "supermarket". It is assigned to the variation pattern of “reach jackpot”. As described above, in the first period excluding the final fluctuation, when the display result is “big hit”, the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

FIG. 11-6(B) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [final fluctuation]. The first period [final change] is the final change of the first period described above (in this example, the 50th special figure game after the change display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or This is the 100th special drawing game after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit". Here, in FIG. 11-6(B), FIG. 11-6(B1) is a diagram showing an example of the deviation variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 11-6(B2) is a big hit variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the final fluctuation of the first period when the gaming state is a low probability/high base state (time saving state), and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is a high accuracy/high base state (probability variation state). And, when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be “out”, the variation pattern is based on the variation pattern determination table (for FIG. 11-6 (B1)) that is common to any gaming state. Will be decided. Also, the final fluctuation of the first period when the gaming state is a low probability/high base state (time saving state), and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is a high accuracy/high base state (probability variation state). And, when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "big hit", the variation pattern is based on the variation pattern determination table (for big hit) (Fig. 11-6 (B2)) that is common in any gaming state. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B1), in the deviation variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 997 will be described later in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Is assigned to the variation pattern of the “indication production (disappearance)”. Further, in any of the setting values “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, as in the case where the setting value is “1”, the judgment value of the MR3 is Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the “implication effect (disappearance)”. As described above, when the display result is “out” in the final change in the first period, the common change pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are “1”. It is assigned to the variation pattern of “indication production (big hit)”. Further, in any of the setting values “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, as in the case where the setting value is “1”, the judgment value of the MR3 is Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the “indication production (big hit)”. As described above, in the final variation of the first period, when the display result is “big hit”, the common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the transition from the first period to the second period (the high base state of the gaming state continues), and whether or not to transition from the first period to the second period ( It is an effect for notifying whether or not the high base state of the gaming state continues. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 to be described later, a continuous challenge effect is executed as a suggestion effect.

In the continuous challenge effect, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, which will be described later, the characters “Continuous Challenge” are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Is displayed, and the character 21TM300 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. Has become.

In the case where the currently controlled game state is the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed, The continuation challenge effect in the failure mode is executed, the characters "failure" and the object "?" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The game state shifts to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) by displaying the characters "failure" or the object indicating "?" indicating that the continuous challenge production has failed on the image display device 5. The player is informed to do so.

In the case where the currently controlled game state is the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed, The continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed, the character "success" and the object "○" are displayed in the center part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. By displaying the character "Success" or the object showing "○" on the image display device 5, which indicates that the continuous challenge effect has succeeded, the continuous challenge effect has succeeded and the gaming state is high/high. The player is informed that the base state (probably changed state) will continue.

FIG. 11-6(C) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the second period. As described above, the second period is a special figure of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state without becoming a big hit game state. It is a period after the game is executed (in this example, 51 times or more or 101 times or more). Here, in FIG. 11-6(C), FIG. 11-6(C1) is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-range variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 11-6(C2) is a big hit variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

In other words, in the second period when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state), when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be “out”, the variation pattern determination table (for out-of-line) ( The variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 11-6 (C1). Also, in the second period when the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state), when the determination result at the start of the variation is determined to be "big hit", the variation pattern determination table (for big hit) ( The variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 11-6 (C2). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state), the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period (FIGS. 11-6 (C1) and (C2)). Not done.

As shown in FIG. 11-6(C1), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 997 out of 1 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3 are “. It is assigned to a fluctuation pattern of "out of reach (fast fluctuation)". Further, in any of the setting values “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, as in the case where the setting value is “1”, the judgment value of the MR3 is Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “non-reach loss (high speed variation)”. As described above, in the second period, when the display result is “out”, the common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (C2), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 997 of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3 is “1”. It is assigned to the variation pattern of “direct hit”. Further, in any of the setting values “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, as in the case where the setting value is “1”, the judgment value of the MR3 is Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “direct hit”. Thus, when the display result is "big hit" in the second period, the common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

(Fluctuation pattern determination table referenced after the special figure 1 big hit)
FIG. 11-7 (A1) shows that the variable display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", and the gaming state is low after the big hit game ends. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the certain/high base state (time saving state) is entered, and the execution timing of each effect. 11-7 (A2), the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", and the gaming state is high after the big hit game ends. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the certain/high base state (probably changed state) is made, and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A1), when the variable display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", the big hit After the game ends, the game state shifts to the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state).

It is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state) in the period of the special drawing game forty-nine times after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(A).

Next, in the 50th special figure game after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the failure mode continuous challenge effect. Then, after the variable display is finished, the game state shifts to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state).

Next, in the special drawing game 51 times or more after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A2), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", big hit After the game ends, the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state).

In the period of the special drawing game 49 times after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(A).

Next, in the 50th special figure game after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability-changed state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode continuous challenge effect. Then, even after the fluctuation display is finished, the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) is continued.

Next, in the special drawing game 51 times or more after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the second period shown in FIG. 11-6(C).

(Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table referenced after the big hit)
FIG. 11-8 (B1) shows that the variable display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", and the gaming state is low after the big hit game is over. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the certain/high base state (time saving state) is entered, and the execution timing of each effect. Figure 11-8 (B2), the variation display result of the second special symbol is either "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", and the gaming state is high after the big hit game ends. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the certain/high base state (probably changed state) is made, and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B1), when the variable display result of the second special symbol is any of "3R normal big hit", "5R normal big hit", and "10R normal big hit", big hit After the game ends, the game state shifts to the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state).

It is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state) in the period of 99 special drawing games after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(A).

Then, in the 100th special drawing game after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the failure mode continuous challenge effect. Then, after the variable display is finished, the game state shifts to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state).

Then, in the special drawing game after 101 times after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B2), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any of "3R certainty variation big hit", "5R certainty variation big hit", and "10R certainty variation big hit", big hit After the game ends, the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state).

In the 99 special character game period after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(A).

Then, in the 100th special figure game after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability-changed state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode continuous challenge effect. Then, even after the fluctuation display is finished, the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) is continued.

Then, in the special drawing game after 101 times after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the second period shown in FIG. 11-6(C).

As shown in FIG. 11-6, the variation pattern determination tables for deviations in each period (first period [excluding final variation], first period [final variation], and second period) are common regardless of set values. Is.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “out”, the fluctuation pattern is longer than the “non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)” (the fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The rate at which "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach loss" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is the variation pattern determination table for the loss in the first period [excluding the final variation]. (See FIG. 11-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is “out”, the rate of selecting “normal reach out” (variation display period is 30 seconds) as the variation pattern is the MR3 determination value. Since 751 to 900 in the range 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “out of normal reach”, [{(900−751+1)/997}×100=15%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is “out”, the rate at which “super reach out” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern is the MR3 determination value. In the range 1 to 997, the range 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “out of super reach”, and thus [{(997-901+1)/997}×100=10%].

Therefore, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “out”, the fluctuation pattern longer than “non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)” (variation display period is 5 seconds) is displayed. The ratio of selecting the period "out of normal reach" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "out of super reach" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is [15+10=25%].

Further, in the second period, when the variable display result is “out”, the change pattern “normal reach out” is a change display period longer than “non-reach out (shortening change)” (change display period is 5 seconds). “(Variable display period is 30 seconds) or “Super-reach is lost” (Variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected in the second period of variation pattern determination table for deviation (see FIG. 11-6 (C1)). Can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variable display result is “out”, “normal reach out” (change display period is 30 seconds) or “super reach out” (change display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the change pattern. The ratio is [(0/997)×100=0%] because none of the judgment values in the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 is assigned.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “out”, the fluctuation pattern is longer than the “non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)” (the fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio of selecting “normal reach loss” (variation display period is 30 seconds) or “super reach loss” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is [15+10=25%], while the second period is selected. In the above, when the variable display result is “out”, the variation pattern is “normal reach out” (variable display period is 30 seconds) or longer than “non-reach out (shortened variation)” (variable display period is 5 seconds) or The rate at which “out of super reach” (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [(0/997)×100=0%]. As described above, in the first period, the “normal reach loss” (variation display period is 30 seconds) or the “super reach” is a variation display period that is longer than “non-reach loss (shortened variation)” (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting “out” (variable display period is 60 seconds) is higher than in the second period.

Also, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “out”, the fluctuation pattern is shorter than “non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)” (variation display period is 5 seconds). The ratio of selecting the period "non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation (Fig. 11-6 (A1) in the first period [excluding final fluctuation]). ) Reference).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “out”, the rate at which “non-reach deviation (high speed fluctuation)” (variation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is Since no judgment value is assigned from the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, [(0/997)×100=0%].

Further, in the second period, when the variation display result is “out”, the variation pattern is “non-reach” (variation display period is 5 seconds), which is a variation display period “non-reach” (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which “out (high speed change)” (change display period is 1 second) is selected can be calculated based on the change pattern determination table for out of the second period (see FIG. 11-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the variable display result is “out”, the rate at which “non-reach out (high speed change)” (the variable display period is 1 second) is selected as the change pattern is within the range of the judgment value of MR3. Since 1 to 997 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “non-reach loss (high-speed variation)”, [{(997-1+1)/997}×100=100%].

In the first period [excluding final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “out”, the fluctuation pattern is shorter than “non-reach deviation (shortened fluctuation)” (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio of selecting a certain “non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)” (variable display period is 1 second) is [0%], while the variable display result is “outlier” in the second period. At this time, the rate of selecting "non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) shorter than "non-reach deviation (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) is [100%]. As described above, in the second period, “non-reach loss (fast variation)” (variable display period is 5 seconds), which is a variable display period shorter than “non-reach loss (short variation)” (variable display period is 1 second) ) Is selected higher than in the first period.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the jackpot variation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final variation], first period [final variation], and second period) is set to a set value. It is common regardless.

In the first period [excluding final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern “super reach big hit” is a fluctuation display period longer than “normal reach big hit” (the fluctuation display period is 30 seconds). (The variation display period is 60 seconds) can be calculated based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-6 (A2)) in the first period [excluding final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the rate at which “super reach big hit” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the MR3 judgment value. In the range of 1 to 997, the range of 51 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot”, and thus [{(997-51+1)/997}×100=95%].

In the second period, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern is “super reach big hit” (variable display) which is a longer variation display period than “normal reach big hit” (variation display period is 30 seconds). The ratio in which the period is 60 seconds) is selected can be calculated based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table for the second period (see FIG. 11-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the rate at which “super reach big hit” (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the change pattern is in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. Of these, none of the determination values is assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot”, and thus is [(0/997)×100=0%].

In the first period [excluding final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern “super reach big hit” is a fluctuation display period longer than “normal reach big hit” (the fluctuation display period is 30 seconds). "(Variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected at a rate of [95%], while when the variable display result is "big hit" in the second period, "normal reach big hit" is given as the change pattern. The ratio of “super reach jackpot” (variable display period 60 seconds) longer than “(variable display period 30 seconds)” is [0%]. As described above, in the first period, the rate at which the “super reach jackpot” (variable display period is 60 seconds), which is a variable display period longer than the “normal reach jackpot” (variable display period of 30 seconds), is selected in the second period. It is higher than the period.

Further, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern is “direct reach big hit” (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a variation display period shorter than “direct hit”. The rate at which "big hit" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-6 (A2)) for the first period [excluding final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the proportion of “direct big hit” (variation display period of 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the MR3 judgment value. Since 1 to 20 in the range 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “direct hit”, [{(20-1+1)/997}×100=2%].

In the second period, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern “direct big hit” (variable display period) is a variation display period shorter than “normal reach big hit” (variable display period is 30 seconds). 10 seconds) can be calculated based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table for the second period (see FIG. 11-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the proportion of “direct big hit” (variation display period of 10 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern is within the range of the MR3 determination values from 1 to 997. , Neither judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern of “direct hit”, so it is [{(997-1+1)/997}×100=100%].

In the first period [excluding final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern “direct big hit” is a fluctuation display period shorter than “normal reach big hit” (the fluctuation display period is 30 seconds). The rate of selecting (variable display period is 10 seconds) is [2%], whereas when the variable display result is “big hit” in the second period, the variation pattern is “normal reach big hit”. The rate at which “direct hit” (variable display period is 10 seconds) shorter than (variable display period is 30 seconds) is selected is [100%]. As described above, in the second period, the proportion of selection of “direct big hit” (variable display period of 10 seconds), which is a variable display period shorter than “normal reach jackpot” (variable display period of 30 seconds), is in the first period. Is higher than.

As described above, in the first period [excluding final variation], the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period that is longer than the predetermined variation display period is higher than that in the second period, and in the second period, a predetermined variation is selected. When the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state due to the fact that the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period shorter than the variation display period is higher than that in the first period [excluding final variation] The interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the setting can be changed in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, a high setting value (for example, the setting value is “4” to “6”) is set. In this case, it is possible to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the setting value is low (for example, the setting value is “1” to “3”). It has become. Therefore, when the high setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is smaller than when the low setting value is set, and the next big hit is won in a short time interval. become. As a result, the possibility that the big hit occurrence interval becomes excessively short increases, so that the gambling performance becomes excessively high, and there is a problem that a sound game performance cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, in the first period [excluding the final variation], the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period is higher than that in the second period. As a result, even when a high setting value (for example, the setting value is "4" to "6") is set, the time to win the jackpot when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state. It is possible to make the interval relatively long (not to be too short), prevent gambling from becoming too high, and realize sound game play.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, when the low setting value (for example, the setting value is “1” to “3”) is set, the high setting value is set. (For example, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50 to 1/44.5) than when the set value is set to "4" to "6". Therefore, when the low setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the high setting value is set, and the big hit is won at a long time interval. There is a problem in that the interest is reduced and the interest is reduced.

However, in the present embodiment, in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period shorter than the predetermined variation display period is higher than that in the first period [excluding final variation]. As a result, even when the set value is low (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, the time to win the jackpot. It is possible to make the interval relatively short (not to be too long), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 causes the ally character and the enemy character to become the ally character and the enemy character after the reach state is established in the variation pattern accompanied by the super reach (“super reach out” and “super reach jackpot”). By performing a battle, a battle production is performed to inform whether or not the jackpot is won.

In the first period [excluding the final change], when the variation display result is “out”, the rate of selecting “super reach out” as the variation pattern is for the deviation in the first period [excluding the final change]. It can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “lost”, the rate of selecting “super reach off” as the fluctuation pattern is within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. Since 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “out of super reach”, [{(997-901+1)/997}×100=10%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is “out”, the rate at which “super reach out” is selected as the variation pattern is determined by the out variation pattern determination table in the second period (FIG. 11-6 (C1)). See)).

In the second period, when the variable display result is “out”, the rate at which “super-reach out” is selected as the change pattern is that any determination value in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3 is “ It is [(0/997)×100=0%] because it is not assigned to the variation pattern of “out of reach”.

As shown in FIG. 11-6(A1), in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is “out”, the rate at which “super reach out” is selected as the variation pattern is While it is [10%], as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C1), when the variable display result is “out” in the second period, “super reach out” is the change pattern. The selected ratio is [0%]. As described above, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate of selecting the “out of super reach” variation pattern is higher than the rate of selecting the “out of super reach” variation pattern in the second period. It's getting higher. That is, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the proportion of the battle effect executed is higher than the proportion of the battle effect executed in the second period.

Similarly, in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the rate at which “super reach big hit” is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the first period [excluding final fluctuation]. Can be calculated based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-6 (A2)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the rate at which “super reach big hit” is selected as the fluctuation pattern is in the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997. Since 51 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot”, [{(997-51+1)/997}×100=95%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the rate at which “super reach big hit” is selected as the change pattern is the change pattern determination table for big hits in the second period (FIG. 11-6 (C2)). See)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the rate at which “super reach big hit” is selected as the variation pattern is “MR3”. Since it is not assigned to the variation pattern of “out of reach”, [(0/997)×100=0%].

As shown in FIG. 11-6(A2), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the proportion of “super reach big hit” selected as the fluctuation pattern is [95%], while as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C2), when the variation display result is "big hit" in the second period, "super reach big hit" is the variation pattern. The selected ratio is [0%]. As described above, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot” is higher than the rate of selecting the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot” in the second period. It's getting higher. That is, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the proportion of the battle effect executed is higher than the proportion of the battle effect executed in the second period.

In this way, the execution ratio of the battle effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game within a predetermined period (first period) from the end of the big hit game state. Also, in the second period after the predetermined period (first period) has passed from the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variable display period is shortened due to the reduction of the execution ratio of the battle effect, so that the high accuracy/high base It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the next big hit does not occur despite being controlled to the state (probably changed state).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, when the high setting value (for example, the setting value is “4” to “6”) is set, the low setting value is set. (For example, the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the set values are set to "1" to "3"). Therefore, when the high setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is smaller than when the low setting value is set, and the next big hit is won in a short time interval. become. As a result, the possibility that the big hit occurrence interval becomes excessively short increases, so that the gambling performance becomes excessively high, and there is a problem that a sound game performance cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, even when a high setting value (for example, the setting value is “4” to “6”) is set, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, the first period [final In [Exclude fluctuation], the ratio of fluctuation patterns with super-reach, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the second period, is selected, so the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively long (excessively short). It can be prevented), gambling is prevented from becoming excessively high, it is possible to realize a healthy game play.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, when the low setting value (for example, the setting value is “1” to “3”) is set, the high setting value is set. (For example, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50 to 1/44.5) than when the set value is set to "4" to "6". Therefore, when the low setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the high setting value is set, and the big hit is won at a long time interval. There is a problem in that the interest is reduced and the interest is reduced.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect in the second period. Thereby, even when the set value is set to a low set value (for example, the set value is “1” to “3”), when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, in the second period, Since the ratio of fluctuation patterns with super-reach that have a longer fluctuation display period than the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is selected is low, the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively short (excessively long It is possible to prevent the decrease of interest.

(Cut-in notice production)
Next, an example of executing a notice effect that gives a notice of the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice production is a notice production that gives advance notice of the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. As shown in FIGS. 11-12 (2), (3), and (4) described later, when the reach is established in the image display device 5, the push button 31B is provided at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate is displayed. When the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, the cut-in notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect has a higher priority than other effect being executed. The cut-in images (cut-in image 21TM200A, cut-in image 21TM200B) on which the characters “Chance” are displayed are displayed on the image display device 5.

In this example, the character displayed in the cut-in image is the character "chance" as the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, and the ratio of whether or not to execute is selected depending on the display result (Fig. 11- Although 10 (B) is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of effect modes (such as “chance” and “hot heat”) in which the displayed characters are different, and each effect mode according to the display result. The selected ratio may be different.

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect (reach effect, etc.) is displayed, the player suddenly has a display mode (display layer is higher in priority than an image related to another effect, etc.). Therefore, a cut-in image is displayed, which appears to be displayed on the front side of an image related to other effects, etc.), so that it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration capable of executing a plurality of effect modes, it becomes of interest to which of the effect modes the cut-in notice effect is executed.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the setting value designation command for designating the set value, executes an effect according to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value.

In this example, the setting value is suggested to the player by changing the aspect of the effect image displayed in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative design is stopped and displayed according to the designated setting value. The first setting suggestion effect is executed. If the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the first setting suggestive effect is executed, the effect image is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see it in the foreground). To be done. That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggesting effect is executed is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern.

The effect images displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the first setting suggestion effect is executed include a white mode, a blue mode, and a red mode. In this example, when the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode is executed, the effect images that emit white light are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and when the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is executed. , The effect image emitted in blue is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and when the first setting suggestive effect in the red mode is executed, the effect image emitted in red in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is displayed. indicate.

Further, in the present example, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the specified set value, so that the player can set the set value. The second setting suggesting effect that suggests is executed. When the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in image in the normal mode is displayed. The cut-in image in the normal mode is a cut-in image in which the character "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in white characters. When the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the cut-in image in the blue mode or the red mode is displayed. The blue mode cut-in image is a cut-in image in which the character "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in blue characters, and the red-mode cut-in image is the cut-in image. It is a cut-in image in which the character "chance" displayed in the image is displayed in red.

(Variation start effect determination process)
CPU103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designating command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designating command for designating the variation pattern, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation Command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type in case of big hit), and variable display period of special symbol and effect contents A variation pattern designation command for designating (reach and super reach, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), the variable display of special symbols is executed, In addition, the variable display period of special symbols and the effect contents (reach, super reach, etc.) can be specified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the special symbol (first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of variation. In this fluctuation start time effect determination process, the presence/absence and execution mode of each of the first setting suggestion effect, the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect are determined. In the following description, the game state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) and is in the first period (50 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 1 big hit, 100 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 2 big hit). (Period) may be referred to as "the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) [first period]", and the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) and the second The state (period) that is a period (51 fluctuations or more from the end of special figure 1 big hit, 101 fluctuations or more from the end of special figure 2 big hit) is defined as "gaming state is high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period]. There is a case.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands (a reserved storage number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of variable display of special symbols. , Effect control pattern for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol based on the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) A collection of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the variation start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-9.

First, CPU120 for production control, (i) the game state is a low-probability/high base state (time saving state), or (ii) the game state is a high-probability/high base state (probability change state) [first period ] Is determined (step S21TM1000). (I) If the gaming state is a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), or (ii) if the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) [first period] (step) (YES in S21TM1000), and proceeds to step S21TM1010 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if (i) the game state is not the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), and (ii) the game state is not the high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) [first period] (step S21TM1000) NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070 and thereafter.

Here, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state) [first period], the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state), and then a big hit occurs. This is a case where the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without being executed within the first period. Further, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period], the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state, and then a predetermined number of times without a big hit ( In the present example, the case is in the second period (in this example, 51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed 50 times or 100 times.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, (i) when the gaming state is a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), or (ii) the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) [first period ] (YES in step S21TM1000), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on the execution presence/absence determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 11-10(A)). Then (step S21TM1010), the process proceeds to step S21TM1020.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(A), in the first setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table, determination for determining whether the first setting suggestion effect execution is performed or not, according to the set setting value. A value has been assigned. When the setting value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggestion effect is 90%. Is determined not to be executed, the white mode first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 5%, and the blue mode first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 3%. It is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 2%. When the set value is “3” or “4” (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “3” or “4”), the first setting is performed at a rate of 90%. It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 5%. Then, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 3%. If the set value is "5" or "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "5" or "6"), the first setting is performed at a rate of 90%. It is determined not to execute the suggestive effect, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 3%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 5%.

In this way, when the set value is “1” or “2”, the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the white mode first setting suggestion effect. The highest ratio (5%), the second highest setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is executed (3%), and the lowest first ratio setting effect in the red mode is performed (3%). 2%). When the setting value is "3" or "4", the first setting suggestion effect of the blue mode is executed as the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The ratio is the highest (5%), the ratio in which the first setting suggestive effect in the red mode is executed is next highest (3%), and the ratio in which the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode is executed is the lowest (2%). ). Further, when the setting value is "5" or "6", the first setting suggestion effect of the red mode is executed as the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The ratio is highest (5%), the ratio in which the blue mode first setting suggestive effect is executed is next highest (3%), and the ratio in which the white mode first setting suggestive effect is executed is the lowest (2%). ).

That is, the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect is a common ratio (10% in this example) regardless of the setting value, and there is no setting difference, but the first setting of each effect mode. As for the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed, the rate at which the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode is selected at a low setting (the setting value is “1” or “2”) is high, and at the intermediate setting (the setting value is "3" or "4") has a high rate of execution of the blue mode first setting suggestion effect, and at the time of high setting (the setting value is "5" or "6"), the red mode first setting suggestion effect is performed. The proportion of performances is high. Therefore, the player is interested in the effect mode when the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is “out of super reach” or “super reach jackpot” (step S21TM1020). When the variation pattern is “out of super reach” or “super reach big hit” (YES in step S21TM1020), whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is determined by the cut-in notice effect execution determination table (FIG. 11-10 ( (See B))) (step S21TM1030), and the process proceeds to step S21TM1040. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is not “out of super reach” or “super reach big hit” (NO in step S21TM1020), the process ends as it is.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(B), in the cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table, a determination value for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed is assigned according to the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the cut-in notice production at a rate of %. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%. Then, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%. In this way, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (step S21TM1040). When it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S21TM1040), the execution presence/absence of the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are set to the execution presence/absence decision table of the second setting suggestion effect (FIG. 11- 10(C)) (step S21TM1050), and the process ends. When it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in step S21TM1040), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the second setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table, determination for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode according to the set value that is set. A value has been assigned. When the set value is "1", "3", or "5" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "1", "3", or "5"), It is determined that the second setting suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 30%, the second setting suggestion effect of the blue mode is executed at a rate of 50%, and the second setting of the red mode is performed at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the suggestive performance. When the set value is "2", "4", or "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "2", "4", or "6") Decides not to execute the second setting suggestive effect at a rate of 30%, decides to execute the first setting suggestive effect in a blue mode at a rate of 20%, and determines to execute the first setting suggestive effect in a blue mode at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute 1 setting suggestion production.

In this way, when the set value is “1”, “3”, or “5”, the second mode of the blue mode is the second mode of the second setting suggestive effect when the second setting suggestive effect is executed. The ratio at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is higher than the ratio at which the second setting suggestion effect in the red mode is executed. In addition, when the setting value is “2”, “4”, or “6”, the second setting suggestion of the red mode is suggested as to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed. The ratio at which the effect is executed is higher than the ratio at which the second setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed. That is, the ratio of the second setting suggestive effect executed is a common ratio (30% in this example) regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference, but the second setting of each effect mode. Regarding the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed, when the odd number is set (the setting value is “1”, “3”, or “5”), the rate at which the second setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is selected is the red mode. 2 setting suggestion effect is higher than the selected rate, and at the time of even setting (setting value is “2”, “4”, or “6”), the second mode of suggesting effect in the blue mode is executed with a red rate. It is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestive effect of the aspect is selected. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the effect mode when the second setting suggestive effect is executed.

Further, if (i) the game state is not the low-probability/high base state (time saving state) and (ii) the game state is not the high-probability/high base state (probability change state) [first period] (step S21TM1000) NO), (iii) it is determined whether the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (step S21TM1060). (Iii) When the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070. (Iii) If the game state is not the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (NO in step S21TM1060), the process ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is “big hit” (step S21TM1070). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestive effect and the effect mode are determined as the presence/absence determination table of the first setting suggestive effect (Fig. 11-10 ( (See A)) (step S21TM1080), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is not the “big hit” (NO in step S21TM1070), the process ends as it is.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect ( Step S21TM1020). That is, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), only when the variable display result is “big hit” (YES in step S21TM1070), the first Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S21TM1020). That is, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variation of the second period when the variation display result is “big hit”. ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the first setting suggestive effect is executed at a rate of 10% (see FIG. 11-10(A)). As described above, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. The execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect of each variable display in the first period is 10%. On the other hand, as described above, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggesting effect is determined only in the final change of the second period. , In the second period, the execution ratio of the first setting suggesting effect until the fluctuation display one time before the final fluctuation in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is 0%, and the fluctuation display result is the “big hit”. The execution ratio of the variation first setting suggestion effect is 10%.

For example, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "probability variation big hit", the game state transitions to the high-accuracy/high base state (probability variation state) after the end of the big hit game, and then 100 special characters If the big hit game state is not reached until the game is executed, the first period is 100 times, and in the first period (100 rotations), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display. Since such a determination is made, the probability that the first setting suggestive effect is executed is [{1-(90/100)^100}×100=99.9%]. On the other hand, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "probable variation big hit", in the second period (after 101 times) after the special figure game is executed 100 times without entering the big hit game state. Since it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is executed only in the final variation in the second period when the display result is “big hit”, which rotational speed is the final variation in the second period? Also, the probability that the first setting suggestive effect is executed is [(10/100)×100=10%]. In this way, since the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period, the gaming state is in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game during the period under the control.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined in step S21TM1010 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect. In step S21TM1050, whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in step S21TM1080. Has been decided. As described above, in the first period, two types of setting suggestion effects, that is, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed, and in the second period, only one kind of setting suggestion effect is produced. Is executed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the period when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state).

Further, when the variation display result is “out”, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A1), “super reach out” is selected as the variation pattern in the first period [excluding final variation]. As for the ratio, since 901 to 997 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of “out of super reach”, [{(997-901+1)/997}×100=10% ]. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “out”, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C1), the ratio of “super reach out” selected as the change pattern in the second period is MR3. Since none of the determination values in the range of determination values 1 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “out of super reach”, [(0/997)×100=0%]. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach in the first period (“out of reach”) is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach in the second period (“out of reach”). .

Further, when the variation display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A2), “super reach big hit” is selected as the variation pattern in the first period [excluding the final variation]. As for the ratio, since 51 to 997 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot”, [{(997-51+1)/997}×100=95% ]. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display result is “big hit” in the second period, the rate at which “super reach big hit” is selected as the variation pattern is determined by the MR3. Since none of the determination values in the range of values 1 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach big hit”, [(0/997)×100=0%]. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach in the first period (“super reach jackpot”) is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach in the second period (“super reach jackpot”). ..

Further, as described above, the execution rate of the first setting suggestive effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the first setting suggestive effect in the second period. As described above, the selection ratios of the fluctuation patterns (“super reach out”, “super reach big hit”) with super reach differ between the first period and the second period, and the first period and the second period differ from each other. Since the execution ratio of 1 setting suggestion production is different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the period when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state).

(Specific example of first setting suggestive effect)
Next, a specific example of the first setting suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-11 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3). 11-11 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is executed in the first period, 11-11 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed in the second period.

(First setting suggestion effect for the first period)
As shown in FIG. 11-11(A1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [first period], the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the chance time. Has been done. When the effect mode is the chance time, "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol). , The second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) variable display is executed, In the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”. The combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0” and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 21TM031 displays the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 21TM021 displays four second hold displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(A2), at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode, and the decorative symbol “is displayed in the symbol display area 5L. 2”, the decorative design “4” is displayed in the design display area 5C, the decorative design “5” is stopped and displayed in the design display area 5R, and the effect images emitted in white in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. 21 TM100A is displayed. The decorative pattern when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see it in the foreground). To do. That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggesting effect is executed is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(A3), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect image 21TM100A displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is erased to end the first setting suggestive effect, and the decorative design "2" is displayed in the design display area 5L, the decorative design "4" is displayed in the design display area 5C, and the decorative design "5" is displayed in the design display area 5R. With the fixed stop, the second small symbol display area 512 is the second small symbol "2", the second small symbol display area 5c2 is the second small symbol "4", the second small symbol display area 5r2 is the second small symbol. The symbol "5" is fixedly stopped.

(First setting suggestion effect for the second period)
As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period], the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to "FEVERZONE". Controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", "Typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol). , The second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 are performing variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol), In the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was "out of bounds", The combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0” and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 21TM031 displays the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 21TM021 displays four second hold displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B2), in response to the display result of "big hit" at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the first setting in the blue mode. The effect is executed, while the decorative design "7" is displayed in the design display area 5L, the decorative design "7" is displayed in the design display area 5C, and the decorative design "7" is displayed in the design display area 5R, and the design display area 5L is displayed. The effect images 21TM100B that emit blue light are displayed on 5C and 5R, respectively. The decorative pattern when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see it in the foreground). To do. That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggesting effect is executed is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of symbols is continued.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect image 21TM100B displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is erased to end the first setting suggestion effect, and the decorative design "7" is displayed in the design display area 5L, the decorative design "7" is displayed in the design display area 5C, and the decorative design "7" is displayed in the design display area 5R. With the fixed stop, the second small symbol display area 512 is the second small symbol "7", the second small symbol display area 5c2 is the second small symbol "7", the second small symbol display area 5r2 is the second small symbol. The symbol "7" is fixedly stopped.

(Specific example of second setting suggestive effect)
Next, a specific example of the second setting suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 (1) to (4). 11-12 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. 11-12 (1), (2), and (4) are explanatory diagrams and are displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production image.

As shown in FIG. 11-12(1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state) [first period], the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the chance time. Has been done. When the effect mode is the chance time, "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol). , The second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) variable display is executed, In the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”. The combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0” and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 21TM031 displays the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 21TM021 displays four second hold displays 21TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12(2), the effect control CPU 120 sets “5” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display 21TM150 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B in the center of the screen while continuing the reach state. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. Has become. The operation promotion display 21TM150 is an image having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, so that it is displayed from the player in front of the background image and the decorative pattern. appear.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. Here, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed in the variation start effect determination process, the cut-in notice effect is executed but the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Does not run. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is executed together with the cut-in notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. However, the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200A in the normal mode (the cut-in image in which the white character "chance" is displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (4), the effect control CPU 120 causes the cut-in advance notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. And the second setting suggestion effect is being executed. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200B in the red form (the cut-in image in which the red character "Chance" is displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display form having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

(Specific example of continuous challenge production)
Next, a specific example of the continuous challenge effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-13 (1) to (7). 11-13(1) and (2) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the failure mode continuous challenge effect is executed. 11-13(1), and (5) to (7) are explanatory views showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the success mode continuous challenge effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-13(1), the final fluctuation in the first period (in this example, the 50th special drawing game after the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol becomes “big hit”, or When the variable display result of the 2 special symbols is the "big hit" and the 100th special drawing game) is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect. The effect control CPU 120 causes the character "Continuous Challenge" to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and the operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B, and the character is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen. 21 TM300 is displayed. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. Has become.

When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol). In the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”. Correspondingly, the combination of decorative symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0” and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, while the continuous challenge effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is not executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the reserved display area (first reserved display) The hold display (first hold display 21TM010, second hold display 21TM020) is not displayed in the area 21TM011 and the second hold display area 21TM021. Further, neither the square object indicating the active display area 21TM031 nor the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

In response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, in FIG. 11-13 (2) to (4), the currently controlled game state is low probability/ On the basis of being in the high base state (time saving state), the continuous challenge effect in the failure mode is executed.

When the currently controlled game state is the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), as shown in FIG. 11-13(2), the production control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 21TM150. In response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the player is playing, a continuous challenge effect in a failure mode is executed, and the characters "failure" and the object "?" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(3), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the display result is “out”. A combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“245” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(4), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, the "daytime image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 is “out”. Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is stopped and displayed, and is executed last time in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ( Corresponding to the variable display result of the first special symbol (most recently executed) was "off", the combination of the first small symbol indicating that the variable display result is "off" (in this example, " 417") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display result of the second special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "off". In response to the occurrence, the combination of the second small symbols (“245” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is continuously displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 21TM031 does not display the active display because there is no variable display currently being executed.

On the other hand, in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed, the currently controlled game state is high in FIGS. 11-13 (5) to (7). Based on the certainty/high base state (probability change state), the continuous challenge production in the success mode is executed.

When the currently controlled gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), the production control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 21TM150 as shown in FIG. 11-13(5). In response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the player is playing, the success challenge continuous production is executed, and the characters "success" and the object "○" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(6), when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the display result is “out”. A combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“245” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(7), when the game state is continuously controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to "FEVERZONE". Controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 is “out”. Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“245” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is fixedly stopped, and is executed last time in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 ( Corresponding to the variable display result of the second special symbol (most recently executed) was "off", the combination of the second small symbol indicating that the variable display result is "off" (in this example, " 245”) is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is “out”. In response to the occurrence, the combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out” is continuously stopped and displayed. Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0”, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, the final fluctuation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special drawing game after the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is “big hit”, or the second special symbol) In the 100th special drawing game after the variable display result of the symbols becomes "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 shifts from the first period to the second period (the high base state continues). A continuous challenge production as a suggestive production to be suggested is being executed. According to such a configuration, the player continues to operate regardless of whether the game state is controlled to be the low-probability/high base state (time saving state) or the high-probability/high base state (probability change state). Until the final change of the first period in which the challenge effect is executed, it is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation of shifting to the second period.

(Other forms)
In the gaming machine that can change the set value described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be simultaneously executed in parallel. Further, the gaming machine whose setting value can be changed may be a gaming state which is different from the big hitting game state and which can be controlled to a small hitting game state which is advantageous to the player. For example, in the small hitting game state, the game ball can be won in a special variable winning ball device different from both the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole and the special variable winning ball device 7 forming the large winning hole. Become. Further, the gaming machine capable of changing the set value may be controllable to a state in which the frequency of small hits is increased (for example, a KT state described later).

For example, the special variable winning ball device is provided on the downstream side of the variable winning ball device in the right game area. When the variable winning ball device is in the open state, the frequency (ratio) of the game balls flowing into the downstream special variable winning ball device which is in the open state becomes extremely low, and when the variable winning ball device is in the closed state, it is opened. Control may be executed to increase the frequency (ratio) of the game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side in the state. With such a configuration, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device is open for a long period (or with a high opening frequency), the special variable winning ball device is in the open state even if the player hits the ball right. The frequency (ratio) of inflow of game balls is low, but in the low base state where the variable winning ball device is opened for a short period (or the opening frequency is low), it is in an open state when right-handed The frequency (rate) at which the game balls flow into the variable winning ball device increases.

For example, it is assumed that the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. Furthermore, it is assumed that there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. Then, the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability state and a non-KT state (low-probability/non-KT state: normal state), and a low-probability state and a first KT state (low-probability/first KT state: a time saving state) Controlled case, high probability state and first KT state (high probability/first KT state; probability variation state), high probability state and second KT state (high probability/second KT state: small hit RUSH state) ).

In the first KT state among the KT states, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device is likely to be opened, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, the downstream side. There are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device is opened for a long time. In the KT state, the second KT state has a short opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side, and when a small hit occurs, it is easy for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the variable winning ball device is opened for a short time.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device will be in the open state in the case of a normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio determined as a small hit when the first special symbol changes is low, the ratio determined as a small hit when the second special symbol changes is high, so the KT state is changed. , It is in a game state that is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

In this way, as the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the small hit is easily controlled, and the low base state is also controlled. By shortening the opening time of, the game ball can be easily won in the special variable winning ball device. According to such a configuration, as a highly accurate state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to control to a highly accurate/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) different from the highly accurate/high base state (probability variation state), and it is possible to achieve high accuracy. The interest of the game in the state can be improved.

(Other modifications)
(1) <Reverse breakthrough small hit RUSH machine>
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, once the high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) is controlled after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation state continues until the next big jackpot occurs. Not limited to the form, at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the end of the big hit game, before the next big hit occurs, the game state is changed from the high-accuracy/high-base state to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) It may be changed.

For example, when the high-precision/first KT state (probability change state) is entered after the jackpot game is over, the high-precision/first KT state (probability change state) is generated until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times ends. ) Is maintained. Then, when the variation display of 100 times is completed without the next big hit, the 101st variation display shifts to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the next big hit occurs. High accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained. On the other hand, when the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state) is entered after the jackpot game is over, the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times ends. ) Is maintained, but the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state) is entered from the 101st variation display. For a player, whether or not the player can break through the variable display for the 100th time without falling into a normal state has a great influence on the subsequent advantage. Therefore, a game machine employing such a configuration is It is called a reverse breakthrough small hit RUSH machine.

In such a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine, after the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) or the low-accuracy/first KT state (time saving state)), the 100th fluctuation There is a first period until the display ends and a second period from the 101st variable display to the next big hit. In the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern in a variable display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variable display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, a predetermined pattern is selected. It is assumed that the rate of selecting the variation pattern in the variable display period (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variable display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that in the first period.

In the first period of this example, the background image is common in any gaming state (high-probability/first KT state (probability variation state) or low-probability/first KT state (time saving state)) controlled after the end of the big hit game. Since the "evening image" is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state is controlled in the first period. Here, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), and if the next jackpot does not occur in the 100th fluctuation display, the success mode described above is continued in the 100th fluctuation display. The challenge effect is executed to shift from the 101st variation display to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Also, after the jackpot game is over, the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state) is entered, and if the next jackpot does not occur in the 100th variation display, the continuous challenge of the failure mode described above in the 100th variation display The effect is executed to shift from the 101st variation display to the low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), the gaming state is highly accurate in response to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times before the next big hit occurs. /Since it is possible to shift to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the time of the variable display for the predetermined number of times, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the KT state (low accuracy/first KT status, high accuracy/first KT status).

In addition, for example, when the high-precision/first KT state (probability variation state) is entered after the end of the big-hit game, the high-precision/first KT is generated until the next big-hit occurs or the number of small-hits occurs 50 times. The state (probably changed state) may be maintained. Then, when the number of small hits is 50 times without the next big hit, the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is displayed from the fluctuation display after the 50th small hit game is over. State), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) may be maintained until the next big hit occurs. On the other hand, when the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state) is entered after the big hit game is over, the low-probability/first KT state (until the next big hit occurs or the number of small hits reaches 50 times). Although the time saving state is maintained, it is assumed that after the 50th small hitting game is finished, the low probability/non-KT state (normal state) is entered.

That is, the first period from the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) or the low-accuracy/first KT state) to the occurrence of the 50th small hit, and the 50th time There is a second period from the end of the small hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit. In the first period of this example, the background image is common in any gaming state (high-probability/first KT state (probability variation state) or low-probability/first KT state (time saving state)) controlled after the end of the big hit game. Since the "evening image" is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state is controlled in the first period. Here, if the next big hit does not occur in the variable display until the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) is reached after the big-hit game is over, and the number of occurrences of the small-hit is 50 times, the small-hit The continuous challenge effect of the above-described success mode is executed with the variable display in which the number of occurrences is the 50th time, and the highly accurate/second KT state (small The winning RUSH state) is entered. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the low probability/first KT state (time saving state) is entered, and when the next big hit does not occur in the variable display until the number of small hits reaches 50 times, the small hit occurs When the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode described above is executed with the variable display that is the 50th time, and the variable display after the next time of the variable display in which the number of occurrences of the small hits is 50 times, the low probability/non-KT state (normal state ).

In this way, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state), the gaming state is changed in response to the number of small hits reaching a predetermined number before the next big hit occurs. Since it is possible to shift to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the time of the variable display for the predetermined number of times, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the KT state (low accuracy/first KT status, high accuracy/first KT status).

(2) <Type 1 type 2 mixer>
In a type of gaming machine called the first type, a big hit determination is made based on the establishment of a start condition, and a big hit game is executed when a big hit is won. Further, in the type of game machine called the second type (feather), an opening/closing prize device having an openable/closable blade accessory is provided, and a game ball wins inside the opening/closing prize device, and the opening/closing prize device When a prize is won in a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside, the big hit game is executed. There is also a type of gaming machine called a type 1/type 2 mixer in which a type 1 type and a type 2 (feather) are fused.

For example, in the one-and-two mixer, the big hit determination is performed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening), and when the big hit is won, the first special prize is given. The variable display result of the symbol becomes the big hit symbol, and the big hit game is executed. In addition, the jackpot determination is made based on the establishment of the second starting condition (for example, the game ball has passed through the second starting area (gate)), and when the jackpot is won, the variable display result of the second special symbol is displayed. Becomes a big hit symbol, and a big hit game is executed. In addition, when the small hit is won, the small hit game in which the blade winning prize which the opening and closing winning a prize device has is opened and closed is executed, subsequently the game ball wins inside the opening and closing winning a prize device, while the feather winning prize is opened, and When a special area (V winning opening) provided inside the opening/closing winning apparatus is won, a big-hit game is executed.

In such a one-two mixing machine, the player wins the game ball in the first start winning opening by performing left-handing in the low base state, and after the big hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the player wins high. Along with being controlled to the base state, the game is played by passing the game ball to the second starting area by switching to the right hit. For example, this high base state (right-handed period) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) ends, and a big hit occurs within the variable display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times. If not, the gaming state will shift to the low base state.

Here, in the effect based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variation display result of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), The variable display result of the second special symbol of each of the second reserved memories (for example, each of the three second reserved memories) existing at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times is started is notified. You may do it. That is, when the second reserved memory number is 3 at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) in the high base state is started, the second special number for the predetermined number of times. In the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols, the variable display results of the second special symbols for a total of four times are notified. Then, after the variable display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) is finished, three variable display of the second special symbol will be executed, but these second special symbols In regard to the variable display of (1), it is assumed that the variation pattern of the extremely short variable display period (for example, 1 second) is designated. That is, to the player, it is as if the variable display for four times was executed by the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time).

In the type 1/type 2 mixer of this example, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without the occurrence of a big hit, or The period until a big hit occurs before the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times corresponds to the first period. Also, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), a special number of times (6 times) of the special drawing game is executed without a big hit, that is, a predetermined number of special drawings. The period during which the special figure game corresponding to the second number of reserved memories at the start of the game is executed corresponds to the second period.

In such a one-and-two-mixer, in the first period, the rate at which the variation pattern having the variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than the predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is the second period. In the second period, the rate of selecting the variation pattern that is the variation display period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that in the first period.

(3) <Probability change fall machine>
As a pachinko game machine, in the state where the gaming state is controlled to the high-precision state, the positive-variable fall determination of whether or not to shift the game state to the low-precision state is executed, and the gaming state is based on the result of the positive-variability fall determination. There is a pachinko game machine that shifts the state to a low accuracy state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such a probability variation fall determination is referred to as a probability variation fall machine.

For example, in the probability variation tumble machine, when "probability variation big hit" occurs, it is controlled to the high-accuracy/high base state (probability variation state) after the big hit game state, and the fluctuation display starts in the high-precision/high base state (probability variation state). The probability variation fall determination is executed at the time. Here, before the 100th variation display is started without the display result of the variation display being executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state) being a “big hit”, (i) variation up to 100 times When it is determined that "there is a probability variation fall" in any of the probability variation fall determinations executed corresponding to the display, the variation display corresponding to the probability variation fall determination (any variation display from the first time to the 100th time) ) Is controlled to a low accuracy/high base state (time saving state), and the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state) is maintained until the 100th variation display ends, and then a low accuracy/low base state ( Controlled to normal state). Here, the period from the time of being controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) after the jackpot game state is ended, until the 100th variation display is executed without falling to the normal state and without the jackpot. Corresponds to the first period.

On the other hand, (ii) if none of the probability variation fall determinations executed corresponding to the variation display up to the 100th time is determined to be “probability variation fall”, it is highly accurate until at least the 100th variation display ends. / High-base state (probability variation state) is maintained, and when the probability variation fall determination executed corresponding to the 101st and subsequent variation display is determined to be "probability variation fall", the variation display corresponding to the probability variation fall determination Is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state) from the start of. Here, the period from the end of the 100th variation display in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) to the fall to the normal state or the occurrence of the next big hit corresponds to the second period.

In such a probability variation falling machine, in the first period, a rate of selecting a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that in the second period. In the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, in the first period, the rate of selection of a variation pattern that is a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that in the second period. In the second period, an example in which the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period (for example, 1 second) shorter than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that for the first period has been shown. However, the period other than the variable display period is not limited to such a form, and the first period and the second period may be different. For example, in the first period, a symbol confirmation stop period (for example, 1.0 seconds) longer than a predetermined period (for example, 0.7 seconds) is set, and in the second period, for a predetermined period (for example, 0.7 seconds). It may be a short symbol fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

(5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), an example in which the ratio of “non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)” is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period is 0% Although shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and “non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)” may be selected as the fluctuation pattern even in the first period.

For example, if a big hit of the type “2R certainty variation big hit [next time]” is provided in addition to the big hit type shown in the present embodiment (see FIG. 11-3 ), there is no 2R normal big hit and the big hit game round. At the time when the number is two rounds, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is “2R certainty variation jackpot [next time]” and is controlled to a high-accuracy/high base state (probability variation state) after the jackpot game is over. Become. For example, in the first period that shifts after the end of the “2R probability variation big hit [next time]”, a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected. If the player's percentage is higher than the second period, the variation is displayed despite the fact that the game state is a highly accurate state (probability variation state) and the player is aware that the state will continue until the next big hit. The interest is reduced due to the long period. Therefore, a specific jackpot type such as "2R probability variation big hit [next time]", for example, a type in which the probability variation state is determined to continue until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends when there is no normal jackpot of the same number of rounds In the first period after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern is determined based on the same variation pattern determination table as in the second period. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the variation pattern is determined to be “non-reach deviation (high-speed variation)”, and it is possible to shorten the variation time in the first period and prevent a decrease in interest.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the selection ratio of the variable display period in the first period and the selection ratio of the variable display period in the second period are made different. The execution rate may be different from the execution rate of the notice effect in the second period.

For example, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the time of start of variation. Here, the execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period may be different. Since the change effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, the interest of the game in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability-changed state) can be improved. Further, in the first period, since the variable display period is long, the change effect requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable effect period is short, and thus the change effect execution rate may be lowered. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes long, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming excessively high, and to realize a sound game performance and to produce a change effect. By being executed at a high rate, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. Further, in the second period, the execution ratio of the change effect is set to be lower than that in the first period, so that the change effect is executed at a high ratio even if the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start or the determination result at the time of the change start, the action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the hold display, the active display) (for example, when the character displays the hold display or the active display). It is assumed that it is possible to execute the effect). Here, the execution ratio of the action effect in the first period may be different from the execution ratio of the action effect in the second period. Since the effect production can be executed in both the first period and the second period, the interest of the game in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) can be improved. Further, in the first period, it is preferable that the action effect requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate because the variable display period is long, and in the second period, the action effect execution rate is low because the variable display period is short. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes long, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, and to realize a sound game performance and to produce an action effect. By being executed at a high rate, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. Further, in the second period, the execution ratio of the action effect is set to be lower than that in the first period, so that the effect is executed at a high ratio even if the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time, which reduces the interest. Can be prevented.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the pre-reading announcement effect that announces the big hit expectation degree of the variable display that is not executed (the variable display that is suspended). Here, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect in the first period may be different from the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect in the second period. Since the pre-reading notice effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). Further, in the first period, the variable display period is long, so that the prefetching notice effect that requires a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so that the prefetching notice effect is preferably executed at a low rate. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes long, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, and to realize a healthy game playability, and at the same time, a pre-reading notice effect. Is performed at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by lowering the execution rate of the prefetching notice effect than in the first period, the prefetching notice effect is executed at a high rate even if the big hit has not occurred for a long period. Can be prevented from decreasing.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect shown in FIG. 11-10(A) may be 10% in the first period, but may be 2% in the second period. On the contrary, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect may be 2% in the first period, but may be 10% in the second period. Further, the execution ratio of the setting suggestive effect may be different corresponding to the number of fluctuation displays executed in the second period. For example, as the number of fluctuation displays executed in the second period increases (so-called probability change). The execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect may be increased as the interim summary becomes longer). Specifically, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is 2% during the period of 101 to 150 fluctuations from the end of the big hit game based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, but the period of fluctuations from 151 to 200 is the first. The execution ratio of the 1st setting suggestion effect may be 5%, and the execution ratio of the 1st setting suggestion effect may be 10% after the change of 201. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the probability variation interval is prolonged.

In the above-described embodiment, as the special effect related to the setting suggestion, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests any one of the low setting (1, 2), the intermediate setting (3, 4), and the high setting (5, 6). And the second setting suggesting effect that suggests whether it is an odd setting (1, 3, 5) or an even setting (2, 4, 6), the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect regarding setting suggestion. May be an effect that suggests that the set value has been changed or that the set value has not been changed. For example, when it is controlled to the setting change mode for changing the set value when the power is turned on, during the subsequent demonstration display or game (for example, there is a pending memory or a variable display of special symbols is displayed. (While being executed), an effect indicating that the set value has been changed may be executed. Also, when the setting value is controlled in the setting change mode and the setting value is changed according to the setting change operation, during the subsequent demonstration display or game (for example, there is a hold memory or a variable display of special symbols is displayed. (While being executed), an effect indicating that the set value has been changed may be executed.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 24TM]
Next, the characteristic part 24TM will be described. The gaming machine shown in the above [description regarding the characteristic part 21TM], that is, the gaming machine capable of changing the set value, of the variable display executed after being controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a high base state) The gaming machine capable of changing the ratio of the selected variation pattern depending on the number of times may be provided with the following characteristic part 24TM.

Specifically, in the gaming machine provided with the characteristic unit 24TM, for example, the type of noticeable effect that can be executed is determined according to the number of variable displays executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, high base state). It may be different. In addition, for example, depending on the number of times of variable display executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a high base state), it is possible to change the mode of the predetermined effect based on the operation of the player. Good. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the movable body effect may be changed according to the number of times of variable display executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a high base state). In this [Description of feature section 24TM], description of the same configuration as the configuration described in [Description of feature section 21TM] will be omitted.

(Relationship between game state and production design and production mode)
In the present embodiment, each gaming state (low probability/low base state: normal state, low certainty/high base state: time saving state, high certainty/high base state: certainty variation state) and each effect design (decorative design, first The relationship between the 1 small symbol, the 2nd small symbol), and each effect mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) is the same as the explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 11-4 described above. However, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high base state (time saving state, probability variation state), the effect music (music piece A, music piece B, music piece C, music piece X) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the game. , Music Y, music Z) can be changed.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating the currently selected effect music on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the ability to select the effect music, and below the icon. The operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed. The operation prompting display 24TM110 is an image imitating the push button 31B, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 24TM110, so that the player is operated by operating the push button 31B. It has been announced that the music can be changed.

In the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, [(effect music)] shown in the effect music selection icon 24TM100 at the lower left part of the screen is displayed. In response to the change, [(effect music)] shown in the effect music selection icon 24TM100, the actual effect music will be changed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. .

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect music indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100 to [Music A]→[Music B]→[Music C] every time the push button 31B is operated. Switch in order. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that has been executed is finished, [effect music] shown in the effect music selection icon 24TM100 in the lower left part of the screen is different from the effect music currently output. Check if

Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, if the [effect music] shown in the effect music selection icon 24TM100 is different from the effect music currently being output, the effect music is changed to the current one. The effect music is changed to the effect music indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100. On the other hand, when the [effect music] indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100 is the same as the effect music currently being output (that is, the push button 31B has not been operated or the push button 31B has been operated). If the same production music as the current production music is selected), the production music is not changed.

For example, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, when the actual performance music is the music A, the performance music shown in the performance music selection icon 24TM100 is [music B], [music C], When it is one of [Song X], [Song Y], or [Song Z], the actual performance music is changed to the performance music shown in the performance music selection icon 24TM100, and the performance music selection icon 24TM100. When the effect music shown in (1) is [Music A], the actual effect music is not changed from [Music A].

12-1 (A1), the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol corresponds to the second special symbol, the first small symbol is the first. It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it corresponds to a special symbol. In addition, FIG. 12-1 (B1) and (B2), the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state), the decorative design and the second small design correspond to the second special design, It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when one small symbol corresponds to a 1st special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 24TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold displays 24TM010) is provided. There is. In the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, a second hold display area 24TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold displays 24TM020) is provided. Further, in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 24TM030, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed, is displayed. An active display area 24TM031 is provided.

Further, a first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number is provided in the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display region 24TM011). A second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided in the right part of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 24TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 for displaying the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol are provided. A second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5.

Here, a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first number of pending storages are displayed in the first pending display area 24TM011, and a number of second pending storages are displayed in the second pending display area 24TM021. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015, the first reserved storage number is numerically displayed, and in the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025, the second reserved storage number is numerically displayed. It The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 24TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first reserved memory number special display area 24TM015, and the first reserved display area 24TM011 has the first reserved memory number The memory number special display area 24TM015 is displayed with higher visibility. Further, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 24TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 24TM021. 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 24TM025.

Further, in the first hold display area 24TM011, when the game state is (i) the low probability/low base state (normal state), the number of objects corresponding to the first hold storage number is displayed. The object itself is not displayed when is either (ii) a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) or (iii) a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state). In this way, in the first hold display area 24TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the game state (when the game state is any of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, the player confirms the first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015 even in the gaming state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 24TM011, The first number of reserved memories can be grasped.

Further, in the second hold display area 24TM021, when the game state is either (ii) low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) or (iii) high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) , The number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number is displayed, but when the game state is (i) the low probability/low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. In this way, in the second hold display area 24TM021, objects corresponding to the second hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second holding display area 24TM021, the player can confirm the second holding storage number by checking the second holding storage number special display area 24TM025. You can

Further, in the active display area 24TM031, regardless of the game state, the object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. ing.

The example shown in FIG. 12-1 (A1) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/high base state (time saving state). When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to be "chance time". When the production mode is "chance time", the background image of the decorative pattern is an "evening image" that represents the evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains, and the words "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. Will be displayed.

In this example, the first reserved memory number is 0, and when the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, the first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015 displays "0", the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025 displays "3", and the second reserved display area 24TM021 displays three second storage areas. The hold display 24TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 24TM031, the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the information (corresponding to the first special symbol which is a symbol) is executed, and the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "out of sync". Then, the combination of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 (“134” in this example) ) Is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2.

Further, an effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating the currently selected effect music ([Music A] in this example) is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and a push button 31B is operated below the effect music selection icon 24TM100. An operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to be displayed is displayed. The operation prompting display 24TM110 is an image imitating the push button 31B, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 24TM110, so that the player is operated by operating the push button 31B. It has been announced that it is possible to change modes.

FIGS. 12-1 (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). As shown in FIG. 12-1 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, Until the special drawing game is executed 50 times or 100 times, or until the jackpot gaming state is achieved before the predetermined number of special drawing games are executed, the gaming state is in the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state). ), the effect mode is controlled to the “chance time”. As described above, when the production mode is “chance time”, the “evening image” representing the evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and “ The word "Chance time" will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B2), after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state, a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in the present example) without becoming a jackpot game state. When the special figure game is executed, it is controlled to an effect mode called "FEVERZONE". When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" representing a landscape of a typhoon including clouds, wind and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and "FEVERZONE" in the center of the screen is displayed. The characters will be displayed.

In the present embodiment, until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state), or the predetermined The period until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the number of special figure games is executed is referred to as a first period. In addition, after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state, a period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without being in the big hit game state (book In the example, 51 times or more or 101 times or more) is referred to as the second period.

In addition, after the game state shifts to the low accuracy/high base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 or 100 times), or the special number of times of the special figure game is executed. The period until the jackpot gaming state before the figure game is executed will be referred to as the first period as in the high-accuracy/high-base state. On the other hand, after the game state shifts to the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without becoming the big hit game state. The subsequent period (in this example, the period after 51 times or 101 times and after the low probability/low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (B1), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is in the state of 3. Further, the first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015 displays "0", the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025 displays "3", and the second reserved display area 24TM021 displays three second storage areas. The hold display 24TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 24TM031, the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the information (corresponding to the first special symbol which is a symbol) is executed, and the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "out of sync". Then, the combination of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 (“134” in this example) ) Is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (B2), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 24TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the information (corresponding to the first special symbol which is a symbol) is executed, and the variable display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is "out of sync". Then, the combination of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is “out” in the first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 (“134” in this example) ) Is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2.

In the present embodiment, unlike the example shown in the above [description regarding the characteristic part 21TM], even in the period (second period) in which the effect mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE", the second reserved display area 24TM021 is displayed. The second hold display 24TM020 is displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the active display area 24TM031 displays the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol). .

As described above, when the game state is in the high base state (time saving state, probability changing state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player, the output is output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the game. It is possible to change the music (music A, music B, music C, music X, music Y, music Z). In the present embodiment, selectable performance songs are different according to the currently controlled performance mode. FIG. 12A shows an example of effect music that can be selected in each effect mode (chance time, FEVERZONE).

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A1) and (B1), when the production mode is controlled to "chance time", selectable production songs are song A, song B, and song C. The player can select any song from song A, song B, and song C by operating the push button 31B. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B2), when the effect mode is controlled to “FEVERZONE”, selectable effect songs are song A, song B, and song C, and song X, song. It is Y and music Z, and the player can select any music from music A, music B, and music C, and music X, music Y, and music Z by operating the push button 31B. Has become. That is, the effect music pieces of the music piece A, the music piece B, and the music piece C can be selected even when they are controlled to any of the "chance time" and "FEVERZONE" effect modes. On the other hand, the effect music pieces of the music piece X, the music piece Y, and the music piece Z can be selected only when the effect mode of “FEVERZONE” is controlled.

(Movable body production)
Next, a look-ahead announcement effect for announcing the jackpot expectation degree of a variable display that has not been executed yet (a variable display in which execution is suspended because the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) will be described. In the following, an example will be described in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body effect in which a movable body operates as a prefetching notice effect. In the present example, the movable-body effect is executed based on the determination that the movable-body effect is to be executed as the look-ahead notice effect in the determination at the time of the start winning.

When it is determined to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-9 and FIG. 12-10 described later, until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed. When the variable display in which the value of the prefetch counter indicating the number of times of variable display of 3 is started, the movable body 24TM200 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position, and then the movable body 24TM200 in the standing position is returned to the tilted position. Perform an action. Next, when the variable display in which the value of the prefetch counter is 2 is started, the movable body 24TM200 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position, and then the operation of returning the movable body 24TM200 in the standing position to the tilted position is executed. . Next, when the variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 1 is started, the movable body 24TM200 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position, and then the movement of the movable body 24TM200 in the standing position is returned to the tilted position. . Next, when the variable display in which the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0 is started (that is, when the variable display which is the target of the prefetch notice effect is started), the movable body 24TM200 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position. At the same time, an effect effect of displaying the flame effect image 24TM250 around the movable body 24TM200 is executed. The flame effect image 24TM250 is an image that is displayed in a superimposed manner on the background image and the decorative pattern, and has a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, and therefore the background from the player. It seems to be displayed in front of the image and the decorative pattern. Then, the operation of returning the movable body 24TM200 in the standing position to the tilted position is executed.

In this way, the variable display that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is displayed a predetermined number of times before the variable display is started (three times before, two times before, and one time before the variation display corresponding to the value of the prefetch counter). In, the operation of moving the movable body 24TM200 from the tilted position to the standing position and then returning it to the tilted position is executed. Then, when the variable display (variable display in which the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0) that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is started, the movable body 24TM200 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position, and the movable body 24TM200 is moved. The effect effect of displaying the flame effect image 24TM250 around is executed. That is, in the movable body effect in the present embodiment, the movable body 24TM200 is continuously operated for three fluctuations before the variable display, which is the target of the prefetching notice effect, is started. It is a production that suggests that a big hit will occur on the target variable display. In addition, in the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect, the movable body 24TM200 is operated in the same manner as the three changes executed before that, and the flame effect image 24TM250 is further displayed, so that the variable display is pre-read. It is suggested (notified) that it is the target of the notice production, and also indicates that a big hit will occur in the variable display.

In the present embodiment, the execution period of the movable body effect (the period in which the movable body is maintained at the standing position) is set to be substantially the same as the variation display period when the variation pattern is “out of reach”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-2 described later, the movable body effect is executed only in the first period, and the variation pattern in the case where the variation pattern is “out of reach” in the first period. Is “non-reach loss (shortened variation)” (variation display period is 5 seconds) (see FIG. 11-6 (A1)). That is, the execution period of the movable body effect in this embodiment is about 5 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body when the value of the look-ahead counter is 4 at the timing when the start winning is generated (when the second reserved memory number at the time of starting winning is 4). Whether or not to execute the effect is determined, and based on the determination to execute the movable object effect, the movable object effect is executed in each variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 3, 2, 1, 0. ing. Not only in such a form, even when the value of the look-ahead counter is a value other than 4 at the timing when the start winning is generated (when the number of second reserved memories at the time of starting winning is not 4), the movable body Whether or not to execute the effect may be determined. For example, even when the value of the look-ahead counter is 3 at the timing when the start winning is generated (when the second reserved memory number at the time of starting winning is 3), the presence or absence of execution of the movable body effect is determined to move the movable object. Based on the decision to execute the body effect, the movable body effect may be executed in each variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 2, 1, 0.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the movable body effect at the time of winning the start prize, the movable body effect may not necessarily be executed from the next variable display (the first variable display after the start prize). The movable-body effect may be executed from the variable display two times after the start winning. In addition, when it is decided to execute the movable body effect at the time of winning the start prize, the movable body effect is executed only in the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect, and the prefetch is performed. The movable body effect may not be executed in the variable display that is the target of the notice effect.

(Countdown production)
Next, an example will be described in which the effect control CPU 120 executes, as the prefetching announcement effect, a countdown effect that suggests (notifies) the number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetching announcement effect is executed. In this example, the countdown effect is executed based on the determination that the countdown effect is to be executed as the prefetching announcement effect in the determination at the time of the start winning.

When it is determined to execute the countdown effect, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 described later, executes the variable display that is the target of the prefetching notice effect. When the variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter indicating the variable display count is 3 is started, the countdown image 24TM300D in which the character “3” is displayed in the round object is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. .. Next, when the variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 2 is started, the countdown image 24TM300C in which the character “2” is displayed in the round object is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 1 is started, the countdown image 24TM300B in which the character “1” is shown in the round object is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the variable display in which the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0 is started (that is, when the variable display which is the target of the prefetch notice effect is started), the character “0” is displayed on the round object. The displayed countdown image 24TM300A is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is displayed a predetermined number of times before the start of the change display (three times before, two times before, and one time before the change display corresponding to the value of the look-ahead counter). A countdown image showing the number of remaining variable displays (characters of "3", "2", or "1") until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed on the round object Is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, which is an effect that suggests that a big hit will occur in the variable display that is the target of the prefetching notice effect. Further, in the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect, the count-down image in which the character “0” is displayed on the round object is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, so that the variable display is pre-read. In addition to suggesting (notifying) the player that it is the target of the notice production, it is also suggested that a big hit will occur in the variable display.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is the execution period of the countdown effect (the period during which the remaining variable display count (value of the prefetch counter) until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed is displayed). The period is approximately the same as the variable display period in the case of “out of reach”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-2 described later, the countdown effect is executed only in the second period, and the variation pattern when the variation pattern is “out of reach” in the second period is “Non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)” (variation display period is 1 second) (see FIG. 11-6 (C1)). That is, the execution period of the countdown effect in this embodiment is about 1 second.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 counts down when the value of the look-ahead counter is 4 at the timing of the start winning (when the number of the second reserved memories at the time of winning the start is 4). Whether or not to execute is determined, and based on the determination to execute the countdown effect, the countdown effect is executed in each variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 3, 2, 1, 0. Not only in such a form, even when the value of the prefetch counter is a value other than 4 at the timing when the start winning is generated (when the second reserved memory number at the time of starting winning is not 4), the countdown effect Whether or not to execute may be determined. For example, when the value of the prefetch counter is 3 at the timing when the start winning is generated (when the number of the second holding storages at the time of starting winning is 3), whether or not to execute the countdown effect is determined, and the countdown effect is determined. Based on the fact that it is decided to execute, the countdown effect may be executed in each variable display in which the value of the look-ahead counter is 2, 1, 0.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the countdown effect at the time of winning the start prize, the countdown effect may not always be executed from the next variable display (the first variable display after the start winning), for example, the start. The countdown effect may be executed from the variable display two times after the winning. Also, when it is decided to execute the countdown effect at the time of winning the start prize, the countdown effect is executed only in the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. The countdown effect may not be executed in the variable display that is the target of.

(Start prize winning decision process)
When the start winning occurs, the CPU 103, of the determination results at the time of winning, a determination result of whether or not to be a big hit, a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of the type of the big hit, and a variation pattern of the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category command indicating the determination result of No. 1 and the reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command, second reserved storage number addition designation command) for designating that the number of reserved storages has increased by 1 are produced. It is transmitted to the control CPU 120.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a start winning a prize effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning a prize effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the following description, the game state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) and is in the first period (50 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 1 big hit, 100 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 2 big hit). (Period) may be referred to as "the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) [first period]", and the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) and the second The state (period) that is a period (51 fluctuations or more from the end of special figure 1 big hit, 101 fluctuations or more from the end of special figure 2 big hit) is defined as "gaming state is high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period]. There is a case.

As described above, the higher the set value, the more the big hits are likely to occur. Therefore, when controlled to a low accuracy/high base state (time saving state) after the jackpot gaming state ends, the higher the set value, the jackpot occurs in the first period, and as a result, the first period continues after the jackpot gaming state ends. The higher the ratio is, and the lower the set value is, the higher the ratio that the gaming state falls to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) after the first period ends without a big hit in the first period .. In addition, when the high-precision/high-base state (probability change state) is controlled after the jackpot gaming state is over, the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot occurs in the first period and, as a result, the higher the percentage does not shift to the second period. As the set value is lower, the big hit does not occur in the first period, and as a result, the ratio of shifting to the second period is higher.

In the effect determination process at the time of starting winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a set of commands at the time of starting winning (for example, a symbol designating command, a variable category designating command) based on the occurrence of the starting winning to the second starting winning opening. , And the second reserved storage number addition designation command) are newly received (step S24TM1010).

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of a symbol designating command, a variation category designating command, and a second reserved storage number addition designating command) is newly stored in the start prize winning command storage area. judge. If a new set of commands for starting winning is not received (NO in step S24TM1010), the process ends.

If a new set of commands for starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S24TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S24TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set on the basis that it is determined that the pending change effect is executed at least once. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S24TM1020), the process ends.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S24TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether (i) the game state is the low certainty/high base state (time saving state) or (ii) the game state is It is determined whether or not it is in the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) [first period] (step S21TM1030). (I) If the gaming state is a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), or (ii) if the gaming state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) [first period] (step) (YES in S24TM1030), and proceeds to step S24TM1040 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if (i) the game state is not the low-probability/high base state (time saving state), and (ii) the game state is not the high-probability/high base state (probability change state) [first period] (step S24TM1030). NO), and proceeds to step S24TM1230 and thereafter.

Here, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state) [first period], the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variation state), and then a big hit occurs. This is a case where the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without being executed within the first period. Further, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period], the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state, and then a predetermined number of times without a big hit ( In the present example, the case is in the second period (in this example, 51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed 50 times or 100 times.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, (i) when the game state is a low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), or (ii) the game state is high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) [first period ] (YES in step S24TM1030), the final display mode of active display is determined based on the final display mode determination table of active display in the first period (see FIG. 12-3(A1)) (step S24TM1030). S24TM1040), the process proceeds to step S24TM1050.

FIG. 12-3(A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of active display in the case of the first period. As shown in FIG. 12-3(A1), in this embodiment, any one of the “normal mode”, the “blue mode”, and the “red mode” can be determined as the final display mode of the active display. Therefore, a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in FIG. 12-3(A1), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting prize is concerned. The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on (new second hold storage) is 90% in the normal mode (white circle display) and 8% in the blue mode (blue circle). The shape is displayed) and the red mode (red circle display) is obtained at a rate of 2%. On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of winning the start is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting prize (new second reserved memory). The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display is 75% in the normal mode, 15% in the blue mode, and 10% in the red mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change pattern of the hold display to the change pattern determination table of the hold display in the first period ((B1) and (C1) in FIG. 12-3, and (D1) and (D1) in FIG. 12-4. (See E1)) (step S24TM1050), and the process proceeds to step S24TM1060.

12-3 (B1) and (C1), and FIGS. 12-4 (D1) and (E1) are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table of the hold display in the first period. When the number of second reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) by the start winning, (i) the n-th second reserved display 24TM020 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the second reserved display area 24TM021. Timing (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the second holding display 24TM020 corresponding to the starting winning shifts to a position (active display area 24TM031 side) having a higher variation rank in the second holding display area 24TM021. Timing (when n≧2) and (iii) Timing at which the second hold display 24TM020 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 (timing at which the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed ), the display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In addition, in the description of FIGS. 12-3 (B1) and (C1), and FIGS. 12-4 (D1) and (E1), the active hold means that the second hold display 24TM020 is active from the second hold display area 24TM021. It means shifting to the display area 24TM031 (as a result, the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize is displayed).

In the present embodiment, at any one of the timings (i) to (iii) described above, a pending notice effect that displays the display information (holding display) corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. It is feasible. In this example, in the hold notice effect, (i) an effect of displaying the mode of the hold display corresponding to the start winning in a display mode different from the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and (ii) or ( iii) The hold change effect of changing the display mode of the second hold display 24TM020 at the shift timing. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in the hold change effect, it acts on the second hold display 24TM020 during the variable display of the second special symbol (decorative design corresponding to this) (for example, the second hold display 24TM020. The effect of changing the display mode may be included.

In FIGS. 12-3 (B1) and (C1), and FIGS. 12-4 (D1) and (E1), display corresponding to variable display is performed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It shows how the information (the second hold display 24TM020 or the active display 24TM030) is displayed. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 12-3 (B1) and (C1) and FIGS. 12-4 (D1) and (E1), “normal” indicates a normal mode in which a white circle is displayed. , "Blue" indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and "red" indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

In the first period, when the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 stores one reservation shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. The determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 101 to 105 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal manner at the time of the start winning, and then the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal manner at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the active shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form. Is. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 103 is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the active shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form. Is. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 105 is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 is 100. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), the change pattern 101 is 5 when the final display manner of the determined active display is the blue manner. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 102 is assigned at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 90%. The judgment values are assigned so that

Regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the change pattern 101 is 10 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 2%, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 70%. Allocated.

In the first period, when the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 stores the two reservations shown in FIG. 12-3 (C1). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. A determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 201 to 208 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

The change pattern 201 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

The change pattern 202 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern for executing the hold change effect at a timing and changing the second hold display of the notice target to a blue mode. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

In the change pattern 203, the second hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form by executing the hold change effect at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the second hold display of the notice target at the time of the start winning. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display subject to advance notice is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 204 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state at the timing. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed.

The change pattern 205 is that the second hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form by executing the hold change effect at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the second hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the active shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red mode. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed twice.

The change pattern 206 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern for executing the hold change effect at a timing and changing the second hold display of the notice target to a red mode. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

In the change pattern 207, the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display subject to advance notice is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 208 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 is 100. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), the change pattern 201 is 10 when the final display aspect of the determined active display is the blue aspect. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 80%.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), when the final display aspect of the determined active display is the red aspect, the change pattern 201 is 10 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at the rate of 2%, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at the rate of 2%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at the rate of 2%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 1%. Allocation, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 8%. The determination values are assigned so that the pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the first period, when the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 has three reservations shown in FIG. 12-4 (D1). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. The determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 301 to 308 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

The change pattern 301 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

In the change pattern 302, the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the hold shift to change the second notice display of the notice target to the blue state, and the second hold display of the notice subject does not change to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. .. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

In the change pattern 303, the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode after the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form. The change pattern is such that the second hold display of the notice target does not change in the blue state at the timing of the second hold shift, and the second hold display of the notice target does not change in the blue state at the timing of the active shift. .. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 304 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the hold shift, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

In the change pattern 305, the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form. Then, the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is changed to the red state, and the second hold display of the notice target is kept in the red state at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed twice.

The change pattern 306 is that the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form and the second hold display of the notice target does not change to the red form at the timing of the active shift. .. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed twice.

The change pattern 307 is that the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. .. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

In the change pattern 308, after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the winning start, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red form at the timing of the hold shift, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), the change pattern 301 is 100 when the final display manner of the determined active display is the normal manner. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the change pattern 301 is 6 The determination value is assigned so as to be determined by the ratio of %, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined by the ratio of 2%, and the variation pattern 303 is determined by the ratio of 2%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 90%.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), the change pattern 301 is 10 when the final display form of the determined active display is the red form. The determination value is assigned so as to be determined by the ratio of %, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined by the ratio of 2%, and the variation pattern 303 is determined by the ratio of 2%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 1%. The change value 306 is assigned, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the change value 307 is assigned the determination value so as to be determined at a rate of 8%. The determination value is assigned such that the pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the first period, the effect control CPU 120, when the second number of reserved storages stored in the second number of reserved storages is “4”, holds four as shown in FIG. 12-4 (E1). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. The determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 401 to 412 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

The change pattern 401 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold display is not changed. At the timing of the hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

The change pattern 402 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. Do not change the second hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and execute the hold change effect at the timing of the third hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form. , A change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 403 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The hold change effect is executed at the timing of the hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue form at the timing of the third hold shift. , A change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

In the change pattern 404, the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form. Then, at the timing of the second hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue form, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue form. , A change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 405 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold display is not changed. At the timing of the hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state, and is changed in the active shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

In the change pattern 406, after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The hold change effect is executed at the timing of the hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift to display the second hold display of the notice target. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode and remains unchanged in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed twice.

The change pattern 407 is such that the second hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form by executing the hold change effect at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the second hold display of the notice target at the time of the start winning. Then, at the timing of the second hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state, and the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift to display the second hold display of the notice target. This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode and remains unchanged in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed twice.

The change pattern 408 is such that the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the blue form. Then, the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode, and the second hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the form is not changed and the second reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed twice.

The change pattern 409 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold display is not changed. Do not change the second hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift, and execute the hold change effect at the timing of the third hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form. , A change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 410 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The hold change effect is executed at the timing of the hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form, and the second hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red form at the timing of the third hold shift. , A change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 411 is that the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold display of the notice target to the red form. Then, at the timing of the second hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red form, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red form. , A change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is executed once.

The change pattern 412 is such that after the second hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. At the timing of the hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state, and the timing of the active shift This is a change pattern in which the second hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state. That is, it is a change pattern in which the pending change effect is not executed.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), the change pattern 401 is 100 when the final display manner of the determined active display is the normal manner. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), when the final display form of the determined active display is the blue form, the change pattern 401 is 10 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 402 is assigned at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 60%. Allocated.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the change pattern 401 is 20 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 402 is assigned at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 20%. Allocation, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 2%. The determination value is assigned so that the pattern 408 is determined at a rate of 2%, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 409 is determined at a rate of 7%, and the change pattern 410 is determined at a rate of 6%. The determination value is assigned so as to be determined by the ratio, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 411 is determined by the ratio of 6%, and the variation pattern 412 is determined by the ratio of 20%. The judgment value is assigned to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of executions of the pending change effect is one or more based on the determined change pattern of the pending display (the number of executions of the pending change effect) (step S24TM1060). .. When the number of executions of the pending change effect is one or more (YES in step S24TM1060), the change prohibition flag is set (step S24TM1070), and the process proceeds to step S24TN1080. When the number of executions of the hold change effect is not one or more (when the hold change effect is not executed) (NO in step S24TM1060), the process directly proceeds to step S24TN1080.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the prefetch counter (step S24TM1080).

In the look-ahead counter, a value (value designated by the second reserved storage number designating command) corresponding to the second reserved storage number updated based on the start winning is set, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by 1 each time it is read (each time the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received). That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is decremented each time the second hold display 24TM020 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of the start winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0, the variable display that is the target of the effect (movable body effect and/or countdown effect described later) is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count flag is set (step S24TM1090). As described later, the count flag is set based on at least the fact that the movable body effect or the countdown effect is executed. If the count flag is not set (NO in step S24TM1090), the flow advances to step S24TM1100. If the count flag is set (YES in step S24TM1090), the process ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the prefetch counter is “4” (step S24TM1100). When the value of the prefetch counter is "4" (YES in step S24TM1100), the presence/absence of execution of the movable body effect is determined based on the execution/absence determination table of the movable body effect (see FIG. 12-7(A)). (Step 24TM1110). If the value of the prefetch counter is not "4" (NO in step S24TM1100), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(A), in the movable body effect execution/non-execution determination table, a determination value for determining whether or not the movable body effect is executed is assigned according to the determination result at the time of the start winning. .. When the determination result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), it is determined that the movable body effect is not executed at a rate of 95% and 5%. It is decided to execute the movable body effect at a ratio. On the other hand, when the determination result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the movable body effect at a rate of 80%, It is decided to execute the movable body effect at a rate of 20%. In this way, when the movable-body effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the movable-object effect is not executed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in whether or not the movable body effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the movable body effect (step S24TM1120). When it is determined to execute the movable body effect (YES in step S24TM1120), the count flag is set (step S24TM1130). If it is determined that the movable body effect is not to be executed (NO in step S24TM1120), the process ends.

The count flag is set when it is determined to execute the movable body effect (YES in step S24TM1120), and the count flag is set when it is determined to execute the countdown effect (YES in step S24TM1320). Has been done. While the count flag is set, even if a new starting prize is generated, the result of the determination in step S24TM1090 is YES, and the movement corresponding to the new starting prize (new second reserved memory) is possible. The body effect is not executed, and if YES is determined in step S24TM1290 described later, the countdown effect corresponding to the new start winning (new second reserved memory) is not executed. The count flag is cleared when the variable display that is the target of the movable body effect is completed, and is cleared when the variable display that is the target of the countdown effect is completed.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control is not (i) the game state is not the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state), or (ii) the game state is not the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state) [first period]. In the case (NO in step S24TM1030), (iii) it is determined whether the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (step S24TM1230). (Iii) When the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S24TM1230), the process proceeds to step S24TM1240. (Iii) If the game state is not the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (NO in step S24TM1230), the process ends.

Next, when the game state is (iii) the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S24TM1230), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the active display to the active state in the second period. The determination is made based on the final display mode determination table for display (see FIG. 12-5 (A2)) (step S24TM1240), and the process proceeds to step S24TM1250.

FIG. 12-5(A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display in the case of the second period. As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A2), in this embodiment, any one of the “normal mode”, the “blue mode”, and the “red mode” can be determined as the final display mode of the active display. Therefore, a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A2), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on (new second reserved memory) is 70% in the normal mode (white circle display) and 29% in the blue mode (blue circle). The shape is displayed), and the red mode (red circle display) is obtained at a rate of 1%. On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of winning the start is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting prize (new second reserved memory). The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display is 60% in the normal mode, 15% in the blue mode, and 25% in the red mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change pattern of the hold display in the change pattern determination table of the hold display in the second period ((B2) and (C2) in FIG. 12-5, and (D2) and (6 in FIG. 12-6). (See E2)) (step S24TM1250), and the process proceeds to step S24TM1260.

FIGS. 12-5 (B2) and (C2), and FIGS. 12-6 (D2) and (E2) are explanatory views showing a specific example of the pending display change pattern determination table in the second period. The change pattern of the change pattern determination table of the hold display in the second period is the change pattern determination table of the hold display in the above-described first period (FIG. 12-3 (B1) and (C1), and FIG. 12-4 ( (See D1) and (E1)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted here, and only the determination value will be described.

In the second period, when the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 stores one reservation shown in FIG. 12-5 (B2). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. The determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 101 to 105 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 is 100. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), when the final display aspect of the determined active display is the blue aspect, the change pattern 101 is 30 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 60%, the change pattern 102 is assigned at a rate of 60%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 10%. The judgment values are assigned so that

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning a prize for start (a display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or a big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the change pattern 101 is 15 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, the change pattern 102 is assigned at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 10%. Allocated.

In the second period, the effect control CPU 120, when the second number of reserved storages stored in the second number of reserved storages is “2”, holds two as shown in FIG. 12-5 (C2). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. A determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 201 to 208 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), when the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 is 100. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), the change pattern 201 is 30 when the final display manner of the determined active display is the blue manner. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or a big hit), the change pattern 201 is 6 when the final display aspect of the determined active display is the red aspect. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at the rate of 10%, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at the rate of 10%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at the rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 6%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 50%. Allocation, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 8%. The determination value is assigned such that the pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In the second period, the effect control CPU 120, when the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area is “3”, holds three as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D2). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. The determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 301 to 308 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), the change pattern 301 is 100 when the final display manner of the determined active display is the normal manner. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), when the final display form of the determined active display is the blue form, the change pattern 301 is 20 The determination value is allocated so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 35%, the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 35%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 35%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), the change pattern 301 is 7 when the final display aspect of the determined active display is the red aspect. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 7%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 45%. The change value 306 is assigned, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 1%.

In the second period, the effect control CPU 120, if the second number of reserved storages stored in the second number of reserved storages is “4”, holds four as shown in FIG. 12-6 (E2). Select the pending display change pattern determination table for the. The determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 401 to 412 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), the change pattern 401 is 100 when the final display manner of the determined active display is the normal manner. The judgment value is assigned so that it is determined as a percentage.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), when the final display form of the determined active display is the blue form, the change pattern 401 is 21 The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 402 is assigned at a rate of 25%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 25%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 25%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 4%. Allocated.

Regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit), the change pattern 401 is 4 when the final display aspect of the determined active display is the red aspect. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 402 is assigned at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the determination value is determined so that the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 3%. The change value 406 is assigned, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the pattern 408 is determined at a rate of 20%, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 409 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 410 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so as to be determined by the ratio, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 411 is determined by the ratio of 5%, and the variation pattern 412 is determined by the ratio of 3%. The judgment value is assigned to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the number of executions of the pending change effect is one or more based on the determined change pattern of the pending display (the number of executions of the pending change effect) (step S24TM1260). . When the number of executions of the pending change effect is one or more (YES in step S24TM1260), the change prohibition flag is set (step S24TM1270), and the process proceeds to step S24TM1280. When the number of executions of the hold change effect is not one or more (when the hold change effect is not executed) (NO in step S24TM1260), the process directly proceeds to step S24TM1280.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the prefetch counter (step S24TM1280).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count flag is set (step S24TM1290). As described later, the count flag is set based on at least the fact that the movable body effect or the countdown effect is executed. If the count flag is not set (NO in step S24TM1290), the flow advances to step S24TM1300. If the count flag is set (YES in step S24TM1290), the process ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the prefetch counter is “4” (step S24TM1300). When the value of the prefetch counter is “4” (YES in step S24TM1300), the presence/absence of execution of the countdown effect is determined based on the presence/absence determination table of the countdown effect (see FIG. 12-7(B)) ( Step S24TM1310). If the value of the prefetch counter is not "4" (NO in step S24TM1300), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in the countdown effect execution/non-execution determination table, determination values for determining whether or not to execute the countdown effect are assigned according to the determination result at the time of winning the start prize. When the determination result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 90%, and a rate of 10%. Decide to execute the countdown effect. On the other hand, when the determination result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 70%, 30 It is decided to execute the countdown effect at a rate of %. In this way, when the countdown effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the countdown effect is not executed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in whether or not the countdown effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the countdown effect (step S24TM1320). When it is determined to execute the countdown effect (YES in step S24TM1320), the count flag is set (step S24TM1330). When it is determined not to execute the countdown effect (NO in step S24TM1320), the process ends.

For example, in the first period, as shown in the change pattern determination table of the hold display for one hold of FIG. 12-3 (B1), the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command Yes, regardless of whether the final display mode of the determined active display is a blue mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 90%. That is, the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 102 that executes the pending change effect at least once is determined at a rate of [5%], and the change pattern 101 and the change pattern that do not execute the pending change effect even once. The determination value is assigned such that 103 is determined at a ratio of [5+90=95%].

Further, in the second period, as shown in the change pattern determination table of the hold display for one hold of FIG. 12-5 (B2), the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command Yes, regardless of whether the final display mode of the determined active display is a blue mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 30%. The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 60%, and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 10%. That is, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 102 that executes the pending change effect at least once is determined at a rate of [60%], and the change pattern 101 and the change pattern that do not execute the pending change effect even once. The determination value is assigned so that 103 is determined at a ratio of [30+10=40%].

In this way, the pending change effect can be executed in any of the first period and the second period. As described above, when one hold and the final display mode is the blue mode, the execution rate of the hold change effect in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the hold change effect in the first period. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-3(B1) to FIG. 12-4(E1) and FIG. 12-5(B2) to FIG. 12-6(E2), one reserved and final display mode is displayed. Not only in the case of the blue mode, but when one hold and the final display mode are the red mode, when two reservations and the final display mode are the blue mode, and when two reservations and the final display mode are the red mode , 3 hold and final display mode is blue mode, 3 hold and final display mode is red mode, 4 hold and 4 final display mode is blue mode, 4 hold and final display mode In any of the above cases, the execution ratio of the pending change effect in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the pending change effect in the first period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), in the first period, when the determination result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), , 95% of the time, it is determined not to execute the movable body effect, and 5% of the time is determined to execute the movable body effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in the second period, when the determination result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”) Decides not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 90%, and decides to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 10%. That is, the execution rate of the countdown effect as the pre-reading notice effect in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the movable body effect as the pre-reading notice effect in the first period. The same is true when the determination result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit").

According to such a configuration, as described above, when the setting value is low, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than that when the setting value is high, In the present embodiment in which a big hit is likely to be won at a long time interval, which tends to cause a decrease in interest, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the prefetching notice effect is different between the first period and the second period ( In the example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect in the first period), so a low setting value (for example, the setting value is "1" to "." 3)), even when the game state is in the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the pre-reading notice effect is easily executed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] (YES in step S24TM1030), it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is executed (step S24TM1110). By doing so, it is possible to execute a movable body effect as a look-ahead notice effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), If you decide to execute the movable body effect at a rate of 5%, and the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, the display result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit") Has decided to execute the movable body effect at a rate of 20%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-2, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S24TM1230), it is determined whether or not to execute the countdown effect ( By performing step S24TM1310), the countdown effect can be executed as the prefetching announcement effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), If you decide to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 10%, and the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the display result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit") , 30% has been decided to execute the countdown effect.

In this way, in the first period, although the movable body effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the determination result at the time of the start winning is either “out” or “big hit” (that is, designated by the symbol designating command). It is determined that the countdown effect is not executed regardless of whether the display result is “out” or “big hit”. On the other hand, in the second period, although the countdown effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice effect, if the determination result at the time of winning the start is either “out” or “big hit” (that is, the display result designated by the symbol designating command is In either case of “out” or “big hit”, the movable body effect is not executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold change effect, which is the pre-reading notice effect common to the first period and the second period, can be executed, while the movable body is provided as the pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only in the first period. An effect is provided, and a countdown effect is provided as a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed only in the second period. By changing the types of pre-reading notice effects that can be executed in the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-6, in the first period, the rate at which the variation pattern of the variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period is selected is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, The rate at which the variation pattern of the variation display period shorter than the predetermined variation display period is selected is higher than that of the first period. If the movable body effect in which the movable body 24TM200 is continuously operated for each variable display is executed in the second period in which the rate of selection of the variation pattern in the short variable display period is high, the movable body 24TM200 is executed. The operating interval of (2) becomes excessively short (the operating frequency of the movable body becomes excessively high), and the possibility of malfunction occurring in the movable body 24TM200 increases due to the influence of heat generation and the like. In the present embodiment, in the second period in which the variation pattern of the short variation display period is highly selected, the movable body 24TM200 has a problem by setting the execution rate of the movable body effect lower than that in the first period. The possibility of occurrence can be reduced.

(Example of production of movable body production in the first period)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the movable body effect can be executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [first period]. An example of the effect when the movable object effect is executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability-changed state) [first period] will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-8 to 12-10.

FIG. 12-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when executing the movable body effect in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [first period], and FIGS. 12-9 and 12- FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the movable object effect is executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [first period].

As shown in FIG. 12-9(1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [first period], the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the chance time. Has been done. When the effect mode is the chance time, "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 12-8), the effect control CPU 120 decorates in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (corresponding to the second special symbol) (Information) is displayed in a variable display, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is " Corresponding to "disappearance", the combination of the first small symbols ("134" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "disappearance" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 24TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0”, and the second reserved memory number is 3. Therefore, “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025 of the image display device 5. The active display area 24TM031 displays the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 24TM021 displays three second hold displays 24TM020.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating that the currently selected effect music is [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the high base state. In addition to the display, the operation prompting display 24TM110 is displayed below the display to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B. The operation prompting display 24TM110 is an image simulating the push button 31B, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 24TM110, so that the player can play it back by operating the push button 31B. It has been announced that it is possible to change the music to be played. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the music A as effect music.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-9(2), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed (T2 shown in FIG. 12-8). Timing), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target is the red mode, and the change pattern of the hold display is the change pattern 408 in which the hold change effect is executed twice. It has been decided. Further, at this time, it is assumed that it is determined to set the value of the prefetch counter to 4 and execute the movable body effect, based on the second number of reserved memories being 4. The value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in step S24TM1070 of FIG. 12-2 based on the decision to execute the pending change effect, and the start winning (after this) ( Execution of the hold change effect for the second hold memory) is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the hold change effect is a period from the display of the second hold display 24TM020, which is the target of the hold change effect, to the end of the variable display corresponding to the second hold display 24TM020.

As a result, when a new start winning is generated within the hold change effect prohibited period, the display mode of the second hold display 24TM020 corresponding to the start prize is changed to another mode during the hold change effect prohibited period. Does not change (YES in step S24TM1020, the processing in step S24TM1030 and thereafter is not executed). In this example, the number of second holding memories is 4 based on the start winning, so the fourth second holding display 24TM020 displayed in the second holding display area 24TM021 is the target of advance notice by the holding change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 of the image display device 5 is at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 12-8 ). The combination "247" of decorative symbols is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the combination "247" of second small symbols is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. Let

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-9(4), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and one second reserved display 24TM020 displayed in the second reserved display area 24TM021 is deleted. Each of them is shifted and displayed on the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the second hold display at the position closest to the active display area 24TM031, is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030. Become. Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-8 ). Then, the second hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (the second hold display 24TM020a in this example).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 3) based on the fact that it is determined to execute the movable body effect. ) The movable body effect is executed to move the movable body 24TM200 from the tilted position to the standing position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-9(5), the effect control CPU 120 is movable at the standing position at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T5 shown in FIG. 12-8). The operation of returning the body 24TM200 to the tilted position is executed, and the combination “352” of the decorative symbols is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5 is stopped. The combination "352" of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in 5c2 and 5r2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-9(6), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and the normal second hold display 24TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 24TM021 is displayed. Then, the second hold display 24TM020a in the blue mode is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the second hold display at the position closest to the active display area 24TM031, is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030. Become. Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-8 ). Then, the second hold display of the notice target is changed from the blue form to the red form (in this example, the second hold display 24TM020a to the second hold display 24TM020b).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that it is determined to execute the movable body effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 2). ) The movable body effect is executed to move the movable body 24TM200 from the tilted position to the standing position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (7), the effect control CPU 120 is movable at the standing position at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-8 ). The operation of returning the body 24TM200 to the tilted position is executed, and the decorative symbol combination “425” is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5 is stopped. The combination "425" of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in 5c2 and 5r2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10(8), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and the normal second hold display 24TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 24TM021 is displayed. Then, the second hold display 24TM020b in the red form is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the second hold display at the position closest to the active display area 24TM031, is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030. Become. Here, the CPU 120 for effect control, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-8), based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display, the second of the notice target. The hold display is not changed as it is in the red mode (the second hold display 24TM020b in this example).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that it is determined to execute the movable body effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 1). ) The movable body effect is executed to move the movable body 24TM200 from the tilted position to the standing position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 is movable at the standing position at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T9 shown in FIG. 12-8 ). The operation of returning the body 24TM200 to the tilted position is executed, and the combination “257” of decorative symbols is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5 is stopped. The combination "257" of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in 5c2 and 5r2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10(10), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and at the same time, the second reserved display 24TM020b in the red mode displayed in the second reserved display area 24TM021 is displayed. Is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020b in the red form that was displayed as the second hold display at a position near the active display region 24TM031 is shifted to the active display region 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030b in the red form. It will be. Here, CPU120 for production control, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 12-8), based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display, the second of the notice target. The hold display is not changed as it is in the red mode (the second hold display 24TM020b in this example).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that it is determined to execute the movable body effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0). ) The movable body effect is executed to move the movable body 24TM200 from the tilted position to the standing position, and the effect effect of displaying the flame effect image 24TM250 around the movable body 24TM200 is executed. The flame effect image 24TM250 is an image that is displayed in a superimposed manner on the background image and the decorative pattern, and has a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, and therefore the background from the player. It seems to be displayed in front of the image and the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10(11), the effect control CPU 120 returns the movable body 24TM200 in the standing position to the tilted position at a predetermined timing (at a timing T11 shown in FIG. 12-8). Is executed to end the movable body effect, erase the flame effect image 24TM250 displayed around the movable body 24TM200, and end the effect effect.

Then, in response to the push button 31B being operated twice by the player (timing T12 shown in FIG. 12-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect music selection icon in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect music shown in 24TM100 is switched in the order of [music B]→[music C]. The effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the music C as the effect music based on the effect music indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100 being changed to [Music C].

Here, in the first period, since the reproducible music pieces are the music piece A, the music piece B, and the music piece C, each time the player operates the push button 31B, the effect music piece selection icon 24TM100 is displayed. The directed musical composition is switched in the order of musical composition A, musical composition B, musical composition C, and musical composition A (repeated below). Even if the player operates the push button 31B, the musical piece X, the musical piece Y, and the musical piece Z which can be reproduced only in the second period are not displayed as selection candidates in the effect musical piece selection icon 24TM100. ..

By operating the push button 31B in this way in the first period, the player selects a music piece to be reproduced from the three music pieces A, B, and C displayed as selection candidates. , The music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed.

(Example of production of movable body production in the second period)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the countdown effect can be executed when in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period]. An example of the effect when the movable object effect is executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period] will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-11 to 12-13.

FIG. 12-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the countdown effect is executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period], and FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the countdown effect is executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period].

As shown in FIG. 12-12(1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) [second period], the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to FEVERZONE. ing. When the effect mode is FEVERZONE, "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 12-11), the effect control CPU 120 decorates in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (corresponding to the second special symbol) (Information) is displayed in a variable display, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is " Corresponding to "disappearance", the combination of the first small symbols ("134" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "disappearance" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 24TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0”, and the second reserved memory number is 3. Therefore, “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 24TM025 of the image display device 5. The active display area 24TM031 displays the active display 24TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 24TM021 displays three second hold displays 24TM020.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating that the currently selected effect music is [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the high base state. In addition to the display, the operation prompting display 24TM110 is displayed below the display to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B. The operation prompting display 24TM210 is an image that imitates the push button 31B, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 24TM110, so that the player can play it back by operating the push button 31B. It has been announced that it is possible to change the music to be played. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the music A as effect music.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12(2), when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 (T2 shown in FIG. 12-11). Timing), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target is the red mode, and the change pattern of the hold display is the change pattern 408 in which the hold change effect is executed twice. It has been decided. In addition, at this time, it is assumed that it is determined that the countdown effect is executed by setting 4 as the value of the prefetch counter on the basis of the number of the second reserved memories being 4. The value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in step S24TM1270 of FIG. 12-2 based on the determination to execute the pending change effect, and the start winning (after this) that occurs ( Execution of the hold change effect for the second hold memory) is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the hold change effect is a period from the display of the second hold display 24TM020, which is the target of the hold change effect, to the end of the variable display corresponding to the second hold display 24TM020.

As a result, when a new start winning is generated within the hold change effect prohibited period, the display mode of the second hold display 24TM020 corresponding to the start prize is changed to another mode during the hold change effect prohibited period. Does not change (YES in step S24TM1020, the processing in step S24TM1030 and thereafter is not executed). In this example, the number of second holding memories is 4 based on the start winning, so the fourth second holding display 24TM020 displayed in the second holding display area 24TM021 is the target of advance notice by the holding change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12(3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 12-11). The combination "247" of decorative symbols is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the combination "247" of second small symbols is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. Let

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12(4), the active display area 24TM031 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and one second reserved display area 24TM020 displayed in the second reserved display area 24TM021 is deleted. Each of them is shifted and displayed on the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the second hold display at the position closest to the active display area 24TM031, is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030. Become. Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-11). Then, the second hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (the second hold display 24TM020a in this example).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that it is determined to execute the countdown effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter is 3). The countdown image 24TM300D in which the character “3” is displayed in the round object is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12(5), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T5 shown in FIG. 12-11). The countdown image 24TM300D in the central part of the screen is erased, the combination of decorative symbols "352" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, The combination "352" of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in 5c2 and 5r2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12(6), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased and the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode displayed in the second hold display area 24TM021 is displayed. Then, the second hold display 24TM020a in the blue mode is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the second hold display at the position closest to the active display area 24TM031, is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030. Become. Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-11). Then, the second hold display of the notice target is changed from the blue form to the red form (in this example, the second hold display 24TM020a to the second hold display 24TM020b).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the look-ahead counter is 2) based on the fact that it has been decided to execute the countdown effect. The countdown effect is executed to display the countdown image 24TM300C in which the character "2" is displayed in the round object in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13(7), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T7 shown in FIG. 12-11). The countdown image 24TM300C in the center of the screen is erased, and the combination of decorative symbols “425” is fixedly fixed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, The combination "425" of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in 5c2 and 5r2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13(8), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and the normal second hold display 24TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 24TM021 is displayed. Then, the second hold display 24TM020b in the red form is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the second hold display at the position closest to the active display area 24TM031, is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030. Become. Here, the CPU 120 for effect control, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-11), based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display, the second of the notice target. The hold display is not changed as it is in the red mode (the second hold display 24TM020b in this example).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that it is determined to execute the countdown effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 1). The countdown effect is executed to display the countdown image 24TM300B in which the character “1” is displayed in the round object in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13(9), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T9 shown in FIG. 12-11). The countdown image 24TM300B in the center of the screen is erased, and the combination of decorative symbols “257” is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, The combination "257" of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in 5c2 and 5r2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect music selection icon 24TM100 indicating [Music A] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 24TM110 and the character "Select" displayed on the right side of the 24TM110 are deleted. As a result, the player is informed that the production music cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13(10), the active display 24TM030 displayed in the active display area 24TM031 is erased, and at the same time, the second reserved display 24TM020b in the red mode displayed in the second reserved display area 24TM021 is displayed. Is shifted to the active display area 24TM031 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5. In this shift display, the second hold display 24TM020b in the red form that was displayed as the second hold display at a position near the active display region 24TM031 is shifted to the active display region 24TM031 and displayed as the active display 24TM030b in the red form. It will be. Here, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (at the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 12-11) based on the change pattern 408 of the hold display, and the second of the notice target. The hold display is not changed as it is in the red mode (the second hold display 24TM020b in this example).

The production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and at the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, 2 Start the variable display of small symbols. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 24TM110 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, it is informed again that the production music can be selected (changed).

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that it is determined to execute the countdown effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0). The countdown effect is executed to display the countdown image 24TM300A in which the character "0" is displayed in the round object in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13(11), the effect control CPU 120 displays the countdown image 24TM300A at the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing (at the timing T11 shown in FIG. 12-11). Erase and end the countdown effect.

Then, in response to the push button 31B being operated three times by the player (timing T12 shown in FIG. 12-11), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect music selection icon in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect music shown in 24TM100 is switched in the order of [Music B]→[Music C]→[Music X]. The effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the music X as the effect music, based on the effect music indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100 being changed to [music X].

Here, in the second period, since there are six reproducible music pieces, music A, music B, and music C, and music X, music Y, and music Z, the player operates the push button 31B. Each time, the effect music displayed on the effect music selection icon 24TM100 is switched in the order of music A→music B→music C→music X→music Y→music Z→music A (hereinafter repeated). When the player operates the push button 31B, in addition to the music A, the music B, and the music C that are reproducible in the first period and the second period, they can be regenerated only in the second period. Music X, music Y, and music Z are displayed as selection candidates on the effect music selection icon 24TM100.

The player operates the push button 31B in this manner in the second period to select the music A, the music B, and the music C displayed as selection candidates, and the music X, the music Y, and the music Z. It is possible to change the music output from the speakers 8L and 8R by selecting the music to be reproduced from the six.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the game state is the high-accuracy state, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in each variable display is 1/50. When the set value is 6, the probability of winning the big hit in each variable display is 1/33.5. At this time, the rate of transition from the first period to the second period is a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) without the occurrence of a big hit after the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state). (Or 100 times) the special figure game is executed. When the predetermined number of times of the first period is 50 times and the set value is 1, the ratio of transition from the first period to the second period is [{(1-1/50)^50}×100=36 .41%], and when the setting value is 6, the ratio of transition from the first period to the second period is [{(1-1/33.5)^50}×100=21.97%]. .. Further, when the predetermined number of times in the first period is 100 times and the setting value is 1, the rate of transition from the first period to the second period is [{(1-1/50)^100}×100. = 13.26%], and when the setting value is 6, the ratio of transition from the first period to the second period is [{(1-1/33.5)^100}×100=4.82%] Becomes That is, the ratio of transition from the first period to the second period when the set value is low (eg, set value 1) is the percentage of transition from the first period to the second period when the set value is high (eg, set value 6). Is higher than.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] (YES in step S24TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body as a prefetching notice effect. It is possible to execute the effect (step S24TM1110), and when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S24TM1230), the countdown effect can be executed as the prefetching notice effect (step). S24TM1310).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, in the first period, the rate of selection of the variation pattern in the variable display period that is longer than the predetermined variable display period is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the predetermined pattern is selected. The rate of selecting the variation pattern in the variable display period shorter than the variable display period is higher than that in the first period.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the setting can be changed in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, a high setting value (for example, the setting value is “4” to “6”) is set. In this case, it is possible to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the setting value is low (for example, the setting value is “1” to “3”). It has become. Therefore, when the high setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is smaller than when the low setting value is set, and the next big hit is won in a short time interval. become. As a result, the possibility that the big hit occurrence interval becomes excessively short increases, so that the gambling performance becomes excessively high, and there is a problem that a sound game performance cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, in the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period is higher than that in the second period. As a result, even when a high setting value (for example, the setting value is "4" to "6") is set, the time to win the jackpot when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state. It is possible to make the interval relatively long (not to be too short), prevent gambling from becoming too high, and realize sound game play.

Here, since the ratio of the long variable display period is selected in the first period is high, the interest during the variable display may be lower than that of the second period in which the ratio of the short variable display period is high. Is high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a pre-reading notice effect, a variable display is performed by setting the ratio of execution of the movable body effect having a relatively long effect time (the effect execution period is about 5 seconds) higher than that in the second period. We are trying to suppress the decline in interest in the inside.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, when the low setting value (for example, the setting value is “1” to “3”) is set, the high setting value is set. (For example, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50 to 1/44.5) than when the set value is set to "4" to "6". Therefore, when the low setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the high setting value is set, and the big hit is won at a long time interval. There is a problem in that the interest is reduced and the interest is reduced.

However, in the present embodiment, in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period shorter than the predetermined variation display period is higher than that in the first period [excluding final variation]. As a result, even when the set value is low (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state, the time to win the jackpot. The spacing can be relatively short (not too long).

Here, since the ratio of the short variable display period is selected in the second period is high, the interest is appropriately improved during the variable display, as compared with the first period in which the ratio of the long variable display period is high. Is difficult. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the prefetching notice effect, the ratio of the countdown effect that the effect time is relatively short (the effect execution period is about 1 second) is executed is set higher than that in the first period, so that the variable display is being performed. I am trying to improve my interests properly.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-2, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] (YES in step S24TM1030), the change pattern of the hold display is determined. When performing (step S24TM1050), the hold change effect can be executed as the prefetching notice effect on condition that the change pattern of the display mode of the hold display is determined. Also, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (YES in step S24TM1230), the display mode of the hold display changes when determining the change pattern of the hold display (step S24TM1250). It is possible to execute the pending change effect as the look-ahead notice effect on condition that the change pattern to be changed is determined. In this way, the common prefetching notice effect can be executed in the first period and the second period, and the game state is in the high base state regardless of whether it is the first period or the second period. Since it is possible to execute the hold change effect in response to a certain thing, it is possible to appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game by using the correspondence information (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display in the high base state. ..

As shown in FIG. 12-13(11), each time the player operates the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 is indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100 in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect music that is present is switched in the order of [Music B] (first operation)→[Music C] (second operation)→[Music X] (third operation). Until the player operates the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the effect music indicated by the effect music selection icon 24TM100 in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is [Music A]. Correspondingly, although the music A was output as the production music from the speakers 8L and 8R, the production music indicated by the production music selection icon 24TM100 is based on the push button 31B being operated by the player. In response to the change to the song X], the effect song output from the speakers 8L and 8R is switched from the song A to the song X.

In the present embodiment, when the setting value is set low, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the setting value is set high (it is easy to shift to the second period). However, there may be a problem that the big hit is won at a long time interval and the interest is reduced. However, in the present embodiment, the number of musical pieces that can be selected by the player (reproducible musical pieces) is increased in response to the number of times of variable display after the jackpot game is reached reaching a predetermined number, so that the setting is made. The lower the set value (the easier it is to shift to the second period), the higher the rate at which the number of songs that can be selected based on the operation (operation) of the player increases. By such effect control, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the set value that is set is low (when it is easy to shift to the second period).

It should be noted that in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect music can be switched based on the operation (operation) of the player in the second period has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and for example, the player in the second period. The effect mode may be switchable based on the operation (operation).

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B2), when the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the production mode “FEVERZONE” is controlled. , A production mode such as “classic mode” or “premier mode” is provided as a production mode other than “FEVERZONE”, and any one of these production modes can be selected based on the operation of the player. It may be configured.

For example, when the production mode is controlled to "classic mode", a black "dark image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "classic mode" are displayed at the top of the screen. Will be done. In addition, when the production mode is controlled to the "classic mode", based on the variation pattern determination table unique to the "classic mode", the countdown production execution/non-execution determination table, etc. The execution rate may be lowered.

Further, for example, when the effect mode is controlled to the "premier mode", a rainbow-colored "rainbow image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the "premium mode" is displayed at the top of the screen. The characters will be displayed. In addition, when the production mode is controlled to the "premier mode", the variation pattern determination table unique to the "premier mode" and the premiere production for notifying that a big hit occurs (a big jack finalized production, for example, Based on the execution/non-execution decision table of the effect of displaying the effect image of 1), the premium effect which is not executed in the other effect modes may be executable.

Further, it may be configured such that a unique effect can be executed in each effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", the countdown effect can be executed but the premium effect cannot be executed. On the other hand, when the effect mode is "premier mode", the countdown effect cannot be executed but the premium effect is executed. It may be possible.

In the first period, the production mode may not be switched even if the player operates, and the production mode may be switched only based on the operation of the player in the second period. In either of the first period and the second period, the effect mode may be switched based on the operation of the player.

In any period of the first period and the second period, it is possible to select any one of a plurality of effect modes based on the operation of the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game in the high base state. Can be made

Also, when the set value is set low, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the set value is set high (it is easy to shift to the second period), and the long time is set. Even if the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game ends is large (in the case of shifting to the second period) in the present embodiment, a problem that the jackpot is won at intervals and the interest may be deteriorated may occur. By being able to switch to any one of a plurality of effect modes based on the player's operation (operation), it is possible to prevent monotonous effect and suppress a decrease in interest. ..

In the gaming machine in which any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected based on the player's operation (operation), [when the effect mode is the "classic mode"] <[the effect mode is The execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect may be increased in the order of "in the case of "premier mode"" <[in the case of effect mode ""FEVERZONE"]. According to such a configuration, the player selects "FEVERZONE" when he/she prefers the look-ahead preview effect and selects "classic mode" when he/she feels that the look-ahead preview effect is troublesome. It is possible to adjust the execution ratio of the notice production. In this way, it becomes possible to set the desired effect execution frequency, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), an example is shown in which the ratio of selecting “non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)” as the fluctuation pattern is 0% in the first period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and “non-reach outliers (high speed fluctuation)” may be selected as the fluctuation pattern even in the first period.

For example, in addition to the jackpot type shown in the above embodiment (see FIG. 11-3), if a jackpot of the type "2R certainty variation jackpot [next time]" is provided, there is no 2R normal jackpot, so a jackpot game At the time when the number of rounds is two, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is “2R certainty variation big hit [next time]” and is controlled to a high-precision/high base state (probability variation state) after the big hit game ends. Becomes For example, in the first period that shifts after the end of the “2R probability variation big hit [next time]”, a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected. If the player's percentage is higher than the second period, the variation is displayed despite the fact that the game state is a highly accurate state (probability variation state) and the player is aware that the state will continue until the next big hit. The interest is reduced due to the long period. Therefore, a specific jackpot type such as "2R probability variation big hit [next time]", for example, a type in which the probability variation state is determined to continue until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends when there is no normal jackpot of the same number of rounds In the first period after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern is determined based on the same variation pattern determination table as in the second period.

If such a configuration is adopted, in the first period after the jackpot game of a specific jackpot type such as "2R probability variation jackpot [next time]", the first period after the jackpot game of another jackpot type is finished. Unlike the above, the countdown effect may be executable as the look-ahead notice effect. That is, when a big hit of a type other than the specific big hit type occurs, the countdown effect is not executed in the first period after the end of the big hit game, but when a big hit of the specific big hit type occurs, the big hit game ends. The countdown effect can be executed in the subsequent first period. As a result, the rate at which a variation pattern is selected that is a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) that is longer than the first period (that is, a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds)) after the end of the jackpot game of a specific jackpot In the first period in which is not higher than the second period), it is possible to perform appropriate effect control corresponding to the variable display period.

(First setting suggestion effect for the second period)
As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), the presence/absence of the first setting suggestive effect and the effect mode are set as follows. 1 setting suggestion production execution presence/absence determination table (see FIG. 11-10(A)) is determined (step S21TM1010), and the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (step S21TM1010). YES in S21TM1060), the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on the execution presence/absence determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 11-10(A)) (step S21TM1080). However, the first setting suggestion is not limited to such a form, and when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period] and the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period]. The table to be referred to when determining whether or not to execute an effect and the effect mode may be different.

For example, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [first period], the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined by the presence/absence determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (FIG. 11-10). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on (A)). The determination is made based on the effect execution determination table (see FIGS. 12-14 (A), (B), and (C)).

12-14(A), (B), and (C) determine whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period]. It is a table that is referred to when doing. In this example, the referenced execution/non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestive effect is changed according to the value of the variable display count n in the second period. Here, the variable display count n is the variable display count executed in the second period, and the variable display count after the big hit game is the variable display count of the second period plus the variable display count of the first period. It was done. That is, in the case of n=10, when the variation display number in the first period is 100 times, the variation display number after the big hit game is [100+10=110 times].

FIG. 12-14(A) shows that after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variation display count is from the first rotation to the 24th rotation (variation display count n in the second period). It is the execution presence/absence determination table of the first setting suggestive effect referred to by 1≦n≦24). FIG. 12-14(B) shows that the variation display count is from the 25th rotation to the 50th rotation since the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period] (the variation display count n in the second period). : 25≦n≦50), which is a table for determining whether to execute the first setting suggestive effect. FIG. 12-14(C) shows that after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variable display count is the 51st rotation and thereafter (variable display count n:51≦n in the second period). ) Is a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(A), after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variation display count is from the first rotation to the 24th rotation (variation in the second period). In the first setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table with the number of times of display n:1≦n≦24), a determination value for determining whether the first setting suggestion effect is executed or not and the effect mode according to the set value. Has been allocated. When the setting value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggestion effect is 90%. Is determined not to be executed, the white mode first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 5%, and the blue mode first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 3%. It is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 2%. When the set value is “3” or “4” (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “3” or “4”), the first setting is performed at a rate of 90%. It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 5%. Then, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 3%. If the set value is "5" or "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "5" or "6"), the first setting is performed at a rate of 90%. It is determined not to execute the suggestive effect, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 3%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 5%.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), since the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variation display count is from the 25th rotation to the 50th rotation (variation in the second period). In the number of display times n: 25≦n≦50) first execution suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table, a determination value for determining the presence/absence of execution of the first suggestion suggestion effect and the effect mode according to the set value. Has been allocated. When the setting value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggesting effect is produced at a rate of 70%. Is determined not to be executed, the white mode first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 15%, and the blue mode first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 9%. It is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 6%. When the set value is "3" or "4" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "3" or "4"), the first setting is performed at a rate of 70%. It is determined not to execute the suggestive effect, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 6%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 15%. Then, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 9%. When the set value is "5" or "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "5" or "6"), the first setting is performed at a rate of 70%. It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 6%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 9%. Then, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 15%.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(C), after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variation display count is the 51st rotation and thereafter (variation display count n in the second period: In the first setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table of 51≦n), determination values for determining the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are assigned in accordance with the set value. When the setting value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggesting effect is produced at a rate of 30%. Is determined not to be executed, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect at a rate of 35%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 21%, It is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 14%. When the set value is "3" or "4" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "3" or "4"), the first setting is performed at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 14%, and it is determined to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 35%. Then, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 21%. When the set value is "5" or "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "5" or "6"), the first setting is made at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 14%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 21%. Then, it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 35%.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(A), after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variable display count is from the first rotation to the 24th rotation (in the second period). The variable display count n: 1≦n≦24) is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of [100−90=10%] regardless of the set value set, and FIG. As shown in -14(B), after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variation display count is from the 25th rotation to the 50th rotation (variation display in the second period. The number of times n: 25≦n≦40) is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of [100-70=30%] regardless of the set setting value, and as illustrated in FIG. As shown in (C), after the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state [second period], the variation display count is the 51st rotation or later (variation display count in the second period n:1≦n ≦24) is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a ratio of [100-30=70%] regardless of the set value. That is, the larger the value of the variable display count n in the second period is, the higher the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the low setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the high setting value is set, and the long time interval is long. There will be a problem that you will win the big hit and lose interest. However, by determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggesting effect based on the table as illustrated in FIGS. 12-14, the larger the value of the variable display frequency in the second period is, the more the first setting suggesting effect is generated. By increasing the execution rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, once the high-probability/high-base state (probability variation state) is controlled after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation state continues until the next big jackpot occurs. Not limited to such a form, the production configuration shown in FIG. 12-1 to FIG. 12-14, etc. is applied to the above-mentioned reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine, one-and-two type mixing machine, and probability variation fall machine, respectively. You may.

Also, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the high-precision control and the time saving control are executed after the completion of the big-hit game at a rate of 100%, and the high-precision/high-base state (probability change state) ), the high-precision/high-base state (probability-changed state) is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the end of the big hit game, and the predetermined number of times without the next big hit ( 12(1) to 12-14() are applied to the ST (special time) machine that shifts to the low-accuracy/low-base state (normal state) when the variable display of 70 times) ends. You may.

(2) In the above embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not simultaneously executed, but the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Not limited to such a form, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be concurrently executable.

(3) In the above embodiment, only when the game state is the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) or the high-probability/high-base state (probability change state), the performance mode (effect music) based on the player's action. , The production mode) can be switched, but not limited to such a form, the production mode (production music, production music, even in the low accuracy/low base state (normal state), based on the operation of the player. It may be possible to switch the effect mode). In addition, in the low certainty/high base state (time saving state), it is not possible to switch the effect mode (effect music, effect mode) based on the operation of the player, but in the high accurate/high base state (assuming change state), It may be possible to switch the effect mode (effect music, effect mode) based on the operation.

Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to control in a small hitting game state different from the big hitting game state, and in the small hitting game state, the special variable winning ball device controlled to be opened in the big hitting game state is larger than the big hitting game state. The control for opening only a small number of times or the opening period may be executed, or the control for opening a special variable winning ball device different from the special variable winning ball device may be executed. Then, it may be possible to control to the high-accuracy state (the above-mentioned KT state) in which the ratio controlled to the small hitting game state is increased. Here, only in the high-accuracy state (KT state), the effect mode (effect song, effect mode) may be switchable based on the player's action, and the low-accuracy state (non-KT described above) and high. In any of the certain states (KT states), the effect mode (effect music, effect mode) may be switchable based on the player's operation. Further, in the high-accuracy/high-base state (first KT state described above), it is not possible to switch the effect mode (effect song, effect mode) based on the player's action, but in the high-accuracy/low base state (second KT described above). In the (state), the effect mode (effect music, effect mode) may be switchable based on the player's action.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the effect mode (effect song, effect mode) can be switched based on the operation (operation) of the player during the period in which the variable display is executed in the high base state However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and even during a period in which the variable display is executed in the high base state, during a specific period, a performance mode (rendering music) based on the player's operation (operation). , Effect mode) may not be switched. For example, after the big hit game (first big hit) based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled to a high-accuracy/high-base state (probability change state) until the next big hit (second big hit) During the period, the common production mode (production music, production mode) is controlled, and even if the player performs the production mode changing operation, the common production mode (production music, production mode) cannot be changed. You may do it.

(5) In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 displays the number of big hit medium prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls given based on the fact that the game balls have won in the big winning opening during the big hit game state. Alternatively, the number of big prize medium prize balls may be continuously displayed even in the high base state after the end of the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs without being in a low base state after the big hit game ends (when a so-called consecutive chan occurs), the next big hit game without resetting the big hit medium prize balls until then. It may be displayed continuously even during the state and updated in accordance with the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening.

In addition, when the small hitting game state is controlled in the KT state in which the rate of control is increased, the small hit is generated in the KT state, and the game ball is awarded to the special winning opening. The number of prize balls in the KT state, which is the total number of prize balls, may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, when the next big hit occurs without being in the non-KT state after the big hit game (when a so-called consecutive chan occurs), the next KT without resetting the number of prize balls in the KT state until then It may be displayed continuously even during the state and updated according to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening.

(6) In the above embodiment, a default performance mode (effect music, effect mode) may be provided. For example, in the low certainty/high base state (time saving state), a predetermined number of times does not occur without the next big hit. When the low accuracy/low bass state (normal state) is controlled by the execution of the variable display of, the effect music and the effect mode selected by the player are reset, and the default effect music (for example, the music A) or the default presentation mode may be set again.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example in which the production music and the production mode can be switched based on the operation (operation) of the player in the second period after the end of the big hit game has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, in the second period, the display mode of the hold display or the active display may be switchable, or the display mode of the decorative design may be switchable, based on the operation (operation) of the player. Further, in the second period, the display mode of the menu screen including the volume adjusting bar and the light amount adjusting bar may be switchable.

Further, in the second period, it is possible to select an aspect of the expectation notice production for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variation display (the variation display) being executed, based on the player's operation (operation). For example, the anticipation notice effect may be an active change effect in which the display mode of the active display is changed, and an operation promotion display 24TM110 that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B when the reach is established is displayed, and the player pushes the push button. It may be a button effect in which characters (“chance”, “heat”, etc.) suggesting a big hit expectation degree are displayed when 31B is operated.

In the second period, the execution ratio of the expectation notice production or the prefetch notice production may be switchable based on the operation (operation) of the player. For example, in the first period, the execution rate of the expectation notice production and the execution rate of the look-ahead notice production are both set to be high, and in the second period, the execution rate of the expectation notice production and the look-ahead notice production are set. The execution ratios may be set to be low. Further, in the first period, the execution rate of the anticipation notice production is set to be high, while the execution rate of the prefetch notice production is set to be low, and in the second period, the execution rate of the expectation notice production is set. May be set to be low, while the prefetching notice effect execution rate may be set to be high.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the production mode and the production execution ratio can be changed based on the operation (operation) of the player in both the first period and the second period has been shown. In the first period, it is not possible to change the effect mode and effect execution ratio based on the player's action (operation), and only in the second period, effect based on the player's action (operation). The mode and the performance execution ratio may be changed.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice production for notifying the big hit expectation degree of the variable display that is not executed (the variable display whose execution is suspended) is different between the first period and the second period. Although an example is shown, the execution rate of the expectation notice production for notifying the big hit expectation degree of the variation display (the variation display) being executed is not limited to such a form, but is executed in the first period and the second period. It may be different.

(10) In the above embodiment, the example in which the movable body effect is not executed in the second period has been shown, but the movable body effect may be executable in the second period. However, the execution ratio of the movable body effect in the second period is lower than the execution ratio of the movable body effect in the first period. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the countdown effect is not executed in the first period has been described, but the countdown effect may be executable in the first period. However, the execution rate of the countdown effect in the first period is lower than the execution rate of the countdown effect in the second period.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the movable body 24TM200 is shown, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a plurality of movable bodies. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine 1 including a movable body A and a movable body B, a first movable body effect in which only the movable body A operates and a second movable body effect in which the movable body A and the movable body B operate can be executed. May be Further, for example, both the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect can be executed in the first period, but the first movable object effect can be executed in the second period, but the second movable object effect can be executed. (That is, the number of types of movable body effects that can be executed in the second period is smaller than that in the first period). Further, the movable body effect in which the movable body A operates can be executed in the first period, but the movable body effect in which the movable body B operates is not executed, and the movable body effect in which the movable body B operates is executed in the second period. Although possible, the movable body effect in which the movable body A operates may not be executed. In this way, the types of movable body effects that can be executed may be different between the first period and the second period.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, examples of a pending change effect, a movable object effect, and a countdown effect are provided as the pre-reading notice effect that predicts the big hit expectation degree of the variable display that is not being executed (the variable display that is being executed is suspended). Although shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and other effects may be executed as the prefetching announcement effect. For example, as the look-ahead notice effect, the above-mentioned button effect or a zone effect in which the background image is a specific image over a plurality of variations may be executed.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 production display device 100 game control microcomputer 120 production control CPU

Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to move to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-200902, A

However, in the case of the gaming machine as in the cited document 1, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work can be suitably executed. There wasn't.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of immediately confirming settings .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting a set value relating to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state,
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling the setting value set by the setting means to a setting confirmation state capable of being confirmed,
Variable means for changing to a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous,
A predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times to change the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state,
Ordinary variable display means for variably displaying the normal identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the game medium has passed the predetermined area,
Ordinary variable timing means for timing the ordinary variable display period for performing variable display of the ordinary identification information,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the change period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state ends. Until the change period is stopped, the change period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is The time measurement of the normal variable display period is suspended until the end, and the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends.
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the game is progressed by subtracting the period during which the variable means is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state, whereby the player is It is possible to prevent a disadvantage.

The game machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
Variable display means capable of executing variable display (variable display) (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120),
And a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has an advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit game state) and a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and is advantageous for the player (high accuracy/high base state ( Probability change state)) and
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
As a period to be controlled to the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times after the game state transitions to the high-probability/high base state (probability change state)) (Or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period ( A period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special state game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without transitioning to the big hit gaming state after the gaming state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state )) and
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is “ When it becomes "out of range", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out" (variation display) is a variation display period that is longer than "non-reach out (shortened variation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). (Period is 30 seconds) or "Out of super reach" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected higher than in the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "out of bounds", in the second period, in the second period, "non-reach out of bounds (high-speed fluctuation)", which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach out of bounds (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period is 5 seconds) (variable display) (Period of 1 second) is selected higher than in the first period [excluding final fluctuation]),
The ratio of transition from the first period to the second period when the first set value (set value 1) is the second set value (set value 6) having a higher advantage than the first set value. It is higher than the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period (when the setting value is 1, the ratio of shifting from the first period to the second period is from the first period to the second period when the setting value is 6). Higher than the transition rate),
The movable body (movable body 24TM200) is provided with a production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body production (a movable body production shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10).
The execution ratio of the movable body effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the movable body effect in the second period (as shown in FIG. 12-2, when the first period is (step By YES in S24TM1030), by determining whether or not to execute the movable body effect (step S24TM1110), the movable body effect can be executed as the prefetching notice effect, while in the second period (in step S24TM1230). (YES), it is determined whether or not to execute the countdown effect without determining whether or not to execute the movable object effect (step S24TM1310), so that the movable object effect cannot be executed as the prefetch notice effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.
The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before variable display (variable display) is executed;
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) executes a notice effect based on the determination made by the determination means (a look-ahead notice effect that predicts the jackpot expectation in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended)). A game machine characterized by being possible.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages,
Variable display means capable of executing variable display,
And a game state control means for controlling the game state,
The game state control means can control an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The variable display pattern selection ratio is common regardless of the setting value,
The period controlled to the special state includes a first period and a second period after the first period,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period,
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period,
The rate of transition from the first period to the second period at the first set value is from the first period to the second period at the second set value having a higher degree of advantage than the first set value. Higher than the transition rate,
Equipped with production control means capable of executing movable body production by a movable body,
An execution ratio of the movable body effect in the first period is different from an execution ratio of the movable body effect in the second period.

Images